| 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15 |
| 2 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
| 4 | |
| 5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. |
| 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS |
| 7 | |
| 8 | Temporary note: +++ indicates that the appropriate manual |
| 9 | has already been updated. --- means no change in the manuals |
| 10 | is called for. |
| 11 | \f |
| 12 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.3 |
| 13 | |
| 14 | ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', |
| 15 | `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of |
| 16 | installed programs. |
| 17 | |
| 18 | \f |
| 19 | * Changes in Emacs 21.3 |
| 20 | |
| 21 | ** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. |
| 22 | |
| 23 | If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs |
| 24 | idle time inseconds to wait before starting fontification. For |
| 25 | example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will |
| 26 | only happen after 0.25s of idle time. |
| 27 | |
| 28 | ** If you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp) repeatedly, the marked region |
| 29 | will now be extended each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with |
| 30 | M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, for example. |
| 31 | |
| 32 | ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window |
| 33 | (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. |
| 34 | |
| 35 | ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on |
| 36 | your current locale settings. If it turns out that your terminal |
| 37 | does not support the encoding implied by your locale (for example, |
| 38 | it inserts non-ASCII chars if you hit M-i), you will need to add |
| 39 | |
| 40 | (set-keyboard-coding-system nil) |
| 41 | |
| 42 | to your .emacs to revert to the old behavior. |
| 43 | |
| 44 | +++ |
| 45 | ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs |
| 46 | automatically at startup, if it exists. And it always offers to save |
| 47 | abbrevs (if you have changed them) when if offers to save modified |
| 48 | buffers. |
| 49 | |
| 50 | ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) |
| 51 | of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor |
| 52 | appears in. |
| 53 | |
| 54 | ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' |
| 55 | were changed. |
| 56 | |
| 57 | ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs |
| 58 | now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. |
| 59 | |
| 60 | +++ |
| 61 | ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to |
| 62 | --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. |
| 63 | |
| 64 | ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin |
| 65 | with a space, if they visit files. |
| 66 | |
| 67 | ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where |
| 68 | filling can break lines. We provide two sample predicates, |
| 69 | fill-single-word-nobreak-p and fill-french-nobreak-p. |
| 70 | |
| 71 | ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. |
| 72 | When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry will always |
| 73 | start a new record regardless of when the last record is. |
| 74 | |
| 75 | ** New user option `sgml-xml'. |
| 76 | When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, |
| 77 | i.e., there is always a closing tag. |
| 78 | When not customized, it becomes buffer-local when it can be inferred |
| 79 | from the file name or buffer contents. |
| 80 | |
| 81 | ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from |
| 82 | initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, |
| 83 | instead of using default-major-mode. |
| 84 | |
| 85 | ** Byte compiler warning and error messages have been brought more |
| 86 | in line with the output of other GNU tools. |
| 87 | |
| 88 | ** Lisp-mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. |
| 89 | |
| 90 | ** perl-mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. |
| 91 | |
| 92 | ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now |
| 93 | understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and |
| 94 | `same-window'. |
| 95 | |
| 96 | ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how |
| 97 | much pure storage it will approximately need. |
| 98 | |
| 99 | ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and |
| 100 | `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To |
| 101 | include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. |
| 102 | |
| 103 | +++ |
| 104 | ** File-name completion can now ignore directories. |
| 105 | If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a |
| 106 | slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when |
| 107 | completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' |
| 108 | which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion |
| 109 | candidate is a directory. |
| 110 | |
| 111 | ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. |
| 112 | When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally |
| 113 | displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. |
| 114 | |
| 115 | ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. |
| 116 | |
| 117 | ** When using M-x revert-buffer in a compilation buffer to rerun a |
| 118 | compilation, it is now made sure that the compilation buffer is reused |
| 119 | in case it has been renamed. |
| 120 | |
| 121 | ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. |
| 122 | This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track |
| 123 | the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. |
| 124 | |
| 125 | ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. |
| 126 | See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. |
| 127 | |
| 128 | --- |
| 129 | ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. |
| 130 | |
| 131 | --- |
| 132 | ** A French translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available. |
| 133 | |
| 134 | ** New modes and packages |
| 135 | |
| 136 | +++ |
| 137 | *** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
| 138 | |
| 139 | Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in |
| 140 | Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, |
| 141 | type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is |
| 142 | available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. |
| 143 | |
| 144 | +++ |
| 145 | *** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution. |
| 146 | |
| 147 | The ELisp reference manual in Info format is built as part of the |
| 148 | Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User |
| 149 | Manual. |
| 150 | |
| 151 | *** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of |
| 152 | the distribution. |
| 153 | |
| 154 | This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed, |
| 155 | together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. |
| 156 | |
| 157 | *** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an |
| 158 | "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually |
| 159 | change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' |
| 160 | settings. |
| 161 | |
| 162 | *** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave |
| 163 | buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. |
| 164 | |
| 165 | It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master |
| 166 | and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi |
| 167 | buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the |
| 168 | commands. |
| 169 | |
| 170 | This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable |
| 171 | sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the |
| 172 | SQL buffer. |
| 173 | |
| 174 | (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook |
| 175 | (function (lambda () |
| 176 | (master-mode t) |
| 177 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) |
| 178 | (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook |
| 179 | (function (lambda () |
| 180 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) |
| 181 | |
| 182 | \f |
| 183 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.3 |
| 184 | |
| 185 | ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. |
| 186 | If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified |
| 187 | (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will |
| 188 | be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element |
| 189 | depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline |
| 190 | is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: |
| 191 | |
| 192 | s{ |
| 193 | foo |
| 194 | }{ |
| 195 | bar |
| 196 | }e |
| 197 | |
| 198 | Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of |
| 199 | text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline |
| 200 | property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) |
| 201 | refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. |
| 202 | |
| 203 | ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is |
| 204 | called to print the entries' values. It default to `princ'. |
| 205 | |
| 206 | ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group |
| 207 | (the last group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. |
| 208 | |
| 209 | ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when |
| 210 | it receives a request from emacsclient. |
| 211 | |
| 212 | ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. |
| 213 | Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more |
| 214 | than 3 levels of nesting. |
| 215 | |
| 216 | ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have |
| 217 | been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used |
| 218 | in Indented-Text mode. |
| 219 | |
| 220 | ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' |
| 221 | property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use |
| 222 | it in that buffer. |
| 223 | |
| 224 | ** If you set `query-replace-skip-read-only' non-nil, |
| 225 | `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore |
| 226 | a match if part of it has a read-only property. |
| 227 | |
| 228 | ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits |
| 229 | properties from surrounding text. |
| 230 | |
| 231 | ** New function `buffer-local-value'. |
| 232 | |
| 233 | - Function: buffer-local-value variable buffer |
| 234 | |
| 235 | This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) |
| 236 | in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in |
| 237 | buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead. |
| 238 | |
| 239 | ** The default value of `paragraph-start' and `indent-line-function' has |
| 240 | been changed to reflect the one used in Text mode rather than the one |
| 241 | used in Indented Text mode. |
| 242 | |
| 243 | ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text |
| 244 | that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one |
| 245 | clone to the other. |
| 246 | |
| 247 | ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. |
| 248 | *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list |
| 249 | of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP@ VAL2 ...) so you can set |
| 250 | other properties than `face'. |
| 251 | *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra |
| 252 | properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. |
| 253 | |
| 254 | ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' |
| 255 | are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the |
| 256 | parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. |
| 257 | |
| 258 | ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument |
| 259 | to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' |
| 260 | and run any code associated with the provided feature. |
| 261 | |
| 262 | ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can |
| 263 | be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. |
| 264 | |
| 265 | +++ |
| 266 | ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now |
| 267 | ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as |
| 268 | `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. |
| 269 | |
| 270 | ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the |
| 271 | user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' |
| 272 | accepts a float as UID parameter. |
| 273 | |
| 274 | ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. |
| 275 | |
| 276 | ** `define-derived-mode' now accepts nil as the parent. |
| 277 | |
| 278 | ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. |
| 279 | |
| 280 | ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'. |
| 281 | |
| 282 | ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'. |
| 283 | |
| 284 | ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when |
| 285 | searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. |
| 286 | |
| 287 | ** Variable aliases have been implemented |
| 288 | |
| 289 | - Macro: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR |
| 290 | |
| 291 | This defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for symbol |
| 292 | BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR returns |
| 293 | the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR changes the |
| 294 | value of BASE-VAR. |
| 295 | |
| 296 | - Function: indirect-variable VARIABLE |
| 297 | |
| 298 | This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases |
| 299 | of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not |
| 300 | defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. |
| 301 | |
| 302 | It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of |
| 303 | variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. |
| 304 | |
| 305 | ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage |
| 306 | collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. |
| 307 | |
| 308 | ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, |
| 309 | the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. |
| 310 | |
| 311 | ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum |
| 312 | have been moved from the CL package to the core. |
| 313 | |
| 314 | ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. |
| 315 | The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was |
| 316 | formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. |
| 317 | |
| 318 | ** New packages: |
| 319 | |
| 320 | *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the |
| 321 | current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). |
| 322 | |
| 323 | *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. |
| 324 | This was actually done in Emacs-21.1 was not documented. |
| 325 | |
| 326 | \f |
| 327 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
| 328 | |
| 329 | See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
| 330 | fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra |
| 331 | charsets in this release. |
| 332 | |
| 333 | ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
| 334 | |
| 335 | ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
| 336 | |
| 337 | ** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
| 338 | images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
| 339 | to list them. |
| 340 | |
| 341 | ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
| 342 | support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
| 343 | maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
| 344 | build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any |
| 345 | necessary changes to unexec. |
| 346 | |
| 347 | ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
| 348 | Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
| 349 | |
| 350 | ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
| 351 | Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
| 352 | |
| 353 | ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
| 354 | the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. |
| 355 | |
| 356 | ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
| 357 | all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
| 358 | lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
| 359 | "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the |
| 360 | description of aspects specific to the Mac. |
| 361 | |
| 362 | ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
| 363 | new display features described below. |
| 364 | |
| 365 | \f |
| 366 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
| 367 | |
| 368 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
| 369 | |
| 370 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. |
| 371 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing |
| 372 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height |
| 373 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in |
| 374 | the text. |
| 375 | |
| 376 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. |
| 377 | |
| 378 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the |
| 379 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, |
| 380 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. |
| 381 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together |
| 382 | specify a font. |
| 383 | |
| 384 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. |
| 385 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found |
| 386 | under Lisp changes, below. |
| 387 | |
| 388 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. |
| 389 | |
| 390 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. |
| 391 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if |
| 392 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and |
| 393 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. |
| 394 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face |
| 395 | attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored |
| 396 | on terminals. |
| 397 | |
| 398 | The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now |
| 399 | supported on character terminals. |
| 400 | |
| 401 | Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of |
| 402 | the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the |
| 403 | same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on |
| 404 | a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. |
| 405 | |
| 406 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
| 407 | |
| 408 | ** Sound support |
| 409 | |
| 410 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
| 411 | driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
| 412 | supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
| 413 | You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable |
| 414 | sound support. |
| 415 | |
| 416 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
| 417 | |
| 418 | If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are |
| 419 | longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it |
| 420 | is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum |
| 421 | minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: |
| 422 | |
| 423 | - User option: max-mini-window-height |
| 424 | |
| 425 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a |
| 426 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it |
| 427 | specifies a number of lines. |
| 428 | |
| 429 | Default is 0.25. |
| 430 | |
| 431 | - User option: resize-mini-windows |
| 432 | |
| 433 | How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always |
| 434 | resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows |
| 435 | grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk |
| 436 | again. |
| 437 | |
| 438 | Default is `grow-only'. |
| 439 | |
| 440 | ** LessTif support. |
| 441 | |
| 442 | Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see |
| 443 | <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
| 444 | |
| 445 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. |
| 446 | |
| 447 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name |
| 448 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
| 449 | non-nil. |
| 450 | |
| 451 | ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. |
| 452 | |
| 453 | When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version |
| 454 | now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a |
| 455 | file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. |
| 456 | |
| 457 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. |
| 458 | |
| 459 | Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for |
| 460 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when |
| 461 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll |
| 462 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll |
| 463 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring |
| 464 | Emacs. |
| 465 | |
| 466 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how |
| 467 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from |
| 468 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your |
| 469 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a |
| 470 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take |
| 471 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. |
| 472 | |
| 473 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take |
| 474 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the |
| 475 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on |
| 476 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your |
| 477 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', |
| 478 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. |
| 479 | |
| 480 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or |
| 481 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. |
| 482 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's |
| 483 | imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
| 484 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
| 485 | |
| 486 | ** Tool bar support. |
| 487 | |
| 488 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details |
| 489 | of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level |
| 490 | changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is |
| 491 | displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved |
| 492 | if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome |
| 493 | icons will be used. |
| 494 | |
| 495 | To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons |
| 496 | for specific modes (with copyright assignments). |
| 497 | |
| 498 | ** Tooltips. |
| 499 | |
| 500 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current |
| 501 | mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can |
| 502 | turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. |
| 503 | |
| 504 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, |
| 505 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with |
| 506 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the |
| 507 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. |
| 508 | |
| 509 | ** Automatic Hscrolling |
| 510 | |
| 511 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
| 512 | `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be |
| 513 | customized. |
| 514 | |
| 515 | If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or |
| 516 | scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound |
| 517 | for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll |
| 518 | the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more |
| 519 | to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. |
| 520 | |
| 521 | ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor |
| 522 | of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is |
| 523 | solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option |
| 524 | `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
| 525 | cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
| 526 | non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
| 527 | |
| 528 | ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display |
| 529 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The |
| 530 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by |
| 531 | customizing face `fringe'. |
| 532 | |
| 533 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. |
| 534 | You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. |
| 535 | In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D |
| 536 | appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line |
| 537 | occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of |
| 538 | the window to be partially obscured.) |
| 539 | |
| 540 | The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older |
| 541 | versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. |
| 542 | However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be |
| 543 | ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. |
| 544 | |
| 545 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
| 546 | |
| 547 | Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
| 548 | systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a |
| 549 | mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the |
| 550 | mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is |
| 551 | displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you |
| 552 | have enabled one. |
| 553 | |
| 554 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: |
| 555 | |
| 556 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. |
| 557 | |
| 558 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. |
| 559 | |
| 560 | - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or |
| 561 | `*') toggles the status. |
| 562 | |
| 563 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. |
| 564 | |
| 565 | ** Hourglass pointer |
| 566 | |
| 567 | Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can |
| 568 | turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. |
| 569 | |
| 570 | ** Blinking cursor |
| 571 | |
| 572 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on |
| 573 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking |
| 574 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in |
| 575 | the group `cursor'. |
| 576 | |
| 577 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
| 578 | |
| 579 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is |
| 580 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. |
| 581 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more |
| 582 | details. |
| 583 | |
| 584 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't |
| 585 | have to do anything to activate it. |
| 586 | |
| 587 | ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. |
| 588 | |
| 589 | The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to |
| 590 | determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. |
| 591 | |
| 592 | On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen |
| 593 | according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace |
| 594 | key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the |
| 595 | option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to |
| 596 | delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On |
| 597 | keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two |
| 598 | keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is |
| 599 | set to nil, and these keys delete backward. |
| 600 | |
| 601 | If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes |
| 602 | a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the |
| 603 | Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via |
| 604 | `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on |
| 605 | the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only |
| 606 | terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. |
| 607 | |
| 608 | Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode |
| 609 | to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. |
| 610 | |
| 611 | ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
| 612 | changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a |
| 613 | buffer by default. |
| 614 | |
| 615 | ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the |
| 616 | current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the |
| 617 | beginning and end of the buffer. |
| 618 | |
| 619 | ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the |
| 620 | recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is |
| 621 | signaled. |
| 622 | |
| 623 | ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init |
| 624 | file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. |
| 625 | |
| 626 | ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
| 627 | compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change |
| 628 | this behavior. |
| 629 | |
| 630 | The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte |
| 631 | compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let |
| 632 | Emacs dump core. |
| 633 | |
| 634 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. |
| 635 | |
| 636 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit |
| 637 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for |
| 638 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. |
| 639 | |
| 640 | ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
| 641 | more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
| 642 | now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
| 643 | |
| 644 | ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set |
| 645 | using that menu. |
| 646 | |
| 647 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
| 648 | |
| 649 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing |
| 650 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is |
| 651 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy |
| 652 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not |
| 653 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the |
| 654 | whitespace. |
| 655 | |
| 656 | ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
| 657 | all frames except the selected one. |
| 658 | |
| 659 | ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to |
| 660 | let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. |
| 661 | |
| 662 | ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs |
| 663 | header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), |
| 664 | so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. |
| 665 | This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option |
| 666 | `Info-use-header-line'. |
| 667 | |
| 668 | ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
| 669 | have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', |
| 670 | `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. |
| 671 | |
| 672 | ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. |
| 673 | |
| 674 | ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is |
| 675 | `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in |
| 676 | `fr-drdref.tex'. |
| 677 | |
| 678 | ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
| 679 | displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the |
| 680 | menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode |
| 681 | menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. |
| 682 | |
| 683 | ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. |
| 684 | |
| 685 | You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' |
| 686 | because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still |
| 687 | use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your |
| 688 | `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. |
| 689 | |
| 690 | ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
| 691 | point in a pop-up window. |
| 692 | |
| 693 | ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
| 694 | under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or |
| 695 | customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. |
| 696 | |
| 697 | The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' |
| 698 | determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
| 699 | |
| 700 | ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
| 701 | sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. |
| 702 | (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
| 703 | You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
| 704 | |
| 705 | ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
| 706 | |
| 707 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
| 708 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
| 709 | |
| 710 | ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
| 711 | trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
| 712 | this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
| 713 | |
| 714 | ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
| 715 | be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
| 716 | non-nil. |
| 717 | |
| 718 | ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
| 719 | set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a |
| 720 | file that is already visited under a different name. |
| 721 | |
| 722 | ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
| 723 | nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. |
| 724 | |
| 725 | ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
| 726 | and displays information about that. |
| 727 | |
| 728 | ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
| 729 | expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. |
| 730 | |
| 731 | This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to |
| 732 | determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a |
| 733 | mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be |
| 734 | interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the |
| 735 | regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode |
| 736 | associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. |
| 737 | |
| 738 | ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
| 739 | suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
| 740 | |
| 741 | ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
| 742 | buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer |
| 743 | contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or |
| 744 | by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and |
| 745 | insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, |
| 746 | the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. |
| 747 | Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. |
| 748 | |
| 749 | ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
| 750 | been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. |
| 751 | |
| 752 | ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
| 753 | system for keyboard input. |
| 754 | |
| 755 | ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
| 756 | coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's |
| 757 | escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores |
| 758 | such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is |
| 759 | recommended not to change it except for the special case that you |
| 760 | always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
| 761 | read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
| 762 | (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
| 763 | RET C-x C-f filename RET. |
| 764 | |
| 765 | ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
| 766 | environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. |
| 767 | |
| 768 | ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
| 769 | displays all characters in that character set. |
| 770 | |
| 771 | ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based |
| 772 | coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. |
| 773 | |
| 774 | ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
| 775 | and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
| 776 | LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
| 777 | |
| 778 | ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
| 779 | Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets |
| 780 | 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). |
| 781 | GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
| 782 | 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. |
| 783 | There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
| 784 | and Polish `slash'. |
| 785 | |
| 786 | ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
| 787 | These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
| 788 | of the tutorial. |
| 789 | |
| 790 | ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
| 791 | function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs |
| 792 | Lisp Coding Convention". |
| 793 | |
| 794 | new command old-binding |
| 795 | --- ------- ----------- |
| 796 | f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 |
| 797 | S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 |
| 798 | C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 |
| 799 | |
| 800 | f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged |
| 801 | S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged |
| 802 | C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged |
| 803 | |
| 804 | S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 |
| 805 | S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 |
| 806 | S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 |
| 807 | S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 |
| 808 | S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged |
| 809 | C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 |
| 810 | |
| 811 | ** There are new Leim input methods. |
| 812 | New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", |
| 813 | "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim |
| 814 | package. |
| 815 | |
| 816 | ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
| 817 | rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus |
| 818 | typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating |
| 819 | "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input |
| 820 | "`", you must type "=q". |
| 821 | |
| 822 | ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
| 823 | 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
| 824 | more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of |
| 825 | empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a |
| 826 | window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this |
| 827 | on. |
| 828 | |
| 829 | ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
| 830 | on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
| 831 | defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
| 832 | commenting with the variable `comment-style'. |
| 833 | |
| 834 | ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
| 835 | `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail |
| 836 | indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the |
| 837 | indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. |
| 838 | |
| 839 | ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
| 840 | on the display using several methods |
| 841 | |
| 842 | - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
| 843 | a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should |
| 844 | be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. |
| 845 | |
| 846 | - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
| 847 | equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
| 848 | |
| 849 | - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
| 850 | |
| 851 | - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is |
| 852 | the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. |
| 853 | |
| 854 | ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
| 855 | an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
| 856 | command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
| 857 | does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
| 858 | |
| 859 | ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
| 860 | `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
| 861 | typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. |
| 862 | |
| 863 | ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
| 864 | characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. |
| 865 | |
| 866 | ** New X resources recognized |
| 867 | |
| 868 | *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
| 869 | whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode |
| 870 | is useful for debugging X problems. |
| 871 | |
| 872 | Example: |
| 873 | |
| 874 | emacs.synchronous: true |
| 875 | |
| 876 | *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
| 877 | visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of |
| 878 | the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
| 879 | and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid |
| 880 | visual class names are |
| 881 | |
| 882 | TrueColor |
| 883 | PseudoColor |
| 884 | DirectColor |
| 885 | StaticColor |
| 886 | GrayScale |
| 887 | StaticGray |
| 888 | |
| 889 | Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. |
| 890 | `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same |
| 891 | meaning. |
| 892 | |
| 893 | The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
| 894 | supported on your display, and which depths they have. If |
| 895 | `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default |
| 896 | visual. |
| 897 | |
| 898 | Example: |
| 899 | |
| 900 | emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
| 901 | |
| 902 | *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', |
| 903 | specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the |
| 904 | default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized |
| 905 | resource values are `true' or `on'. |
| 906 | |
| 907 | Example: |
| 908 | |
| 909 | emacs.privateColormap: true |
| 910 | |
| 911 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
| 912 | |
| 913 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. |
| 914 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
| 915 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face |
| 916 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' |
| 917 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise |
| 918 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame |
| 919 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. |
| 920 | |
| 921 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the |
| 922 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters |
| 923 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
| 924 | `default' face and vice versa. |
| 925 | |
| 926 | ** New face `menu'. |
| 927 | |
| 928 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. |
| 929 | |
| 930 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
| 931 | |
| 932 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for |
| 933 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma |
| 934 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies |
| 935 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. |
| 936 | |
| 937 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result |
| 938 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD |
| 939 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). |
| 940 | |
| 941 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class |
| 942 | `ScreenGamma'. |
| 943 | |
| 944 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. |
| 945 | |
| 946 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is |
| 947 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is |
| 948 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. |
| 949 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. |
| 950 | |
| 951 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar |
| 952 | |
| 953 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
| 954 | |
| 955 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 |
| 956 | |
| 957 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
| 958 | LessTif/Motif one. |
| 959 | |
| 960 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
| 961 | LessTif and Motif. |
| 962 | |
| 963 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
| 964 | |
| 965 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be |
| 966 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set |
| 967 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. |
| 968 | |
| 969 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
| 970 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). |
| 971 | |
| 972 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable |
| 973 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this |
| 974 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. |
| 975 | |
| 976 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
| 977 | |
| 978 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the |
| 979 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
| 980 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
| 981 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
| 982 | |
| 983 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the |
| 984 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
| 985 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
| 986 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
| 987 | |
| 988 | ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either |
| 989 | M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. |
| 990 | M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special |
| 991 | buffers. |
| 992 | |
| 993 | ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
| 994 | |
| 995 | ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
| 996 | abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing |
| 997 | `directory-abbrev-alist'. |
| 998 | |
| 999 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
| 1000 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be |
| 1001 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this |
| 1002 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system |
| 1003 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, |
| 1004 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. |
| 1005 | |
| 1006 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. |
| 1007 | |
| 1008 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
| 1009 | notably at the end of lines. |
| 1010 | |
| 1011 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted |
| 1012 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. |
| 1013 | |
| 1014 | ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
| 1015 | |
| 1016 | ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
| 1017 | but inserts text instead of replacing it. |
| 1018 | |
| 1019 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
| 1020 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated |
| 1021 | after each match to get the replacement text. |
| 1022 | |
| 1023 | ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
| 1024 | you edit the replacement string. |
| 1025 | |
| 1026 | ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' |
| 1027 | (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases |
| 1028 | in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. |
| 1029 | |
| 1030 | ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
| 1033 | to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. |
| 1034 | |
| 1035 | ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
| 1036 | the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
| 1037 | MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
| 1038 | displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
| 1039 | |
| 1040 | -- |
| 1041 | ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
| 1042 | read mail from the menu etc. |
| 1043 | |
| 1044 | ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
| 1045 | This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on |
| 1046 | MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made |
| 1047 | before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. |
| 1048 | |
| 1049 | ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
| 1050 | MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
| 1051 | |
| 1052 | ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version |
| 1053 | of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. |
| 1054 | This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons |
| 1055 | correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, |
| 1056 | but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version |
| 1057 | of Emacs. |
| 1058 | |
| 1059 | ** Customize changes |
| 1060 | |
| 1061 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
| 1062 | `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to |
| 1063 | M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that |
| 1064 | customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in |
| 1065 | earlier versions of Emacs. |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
| 1068 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the |
| 1069 | default). |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 | *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
| 1072 | does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init |
| 1073 | file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would |
| 1074 | wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init |
| 1075 | file. |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 | ** New features in evaluation commands |
| 1078 | |
| 1079 | *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
| 1080 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
| 1081 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new |
| 1082 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, |
| 1083 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. |
| 1084 | |
| 1085 | The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 |
| 1086 | respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most |
| 1087 | the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if |
| 1088 | the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is |
| 1089 | printed). |
| 1090 | |
| 1091 | <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated |
| 1092 | printed representation and an unabbreviated one. |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 | The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error |
| 1095 | during evaluation produces a backtrace. |
| 1096 | |
| 1097 | *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
| 1098 | code when called with a prefix argument. |
| 1099 | |
| 1100 | ** CC mode changes. |
| 1101 | |
| 1102 | Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with |
| 1103 | current user setups (although it's believed that these |
| 1104 | incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). |
| 1105 | However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled |
| 1106 | back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward |
| 1107 | compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this |
| 1108 | release. |
| 1109 | |
| 1110 | *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
| 1111 | CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode |
| 1112 | is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much |
| 1113 | confusion. |
| 1114 | |
| 1115 | However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the |
| 1116 | default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for |
| 1117 | java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't |
| 1118 | notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 | *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. |
| 1121 | Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: |
| 1122 | |
| 1123 | space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening |
| 1124 | parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". |
| 1125 | |
| 1126 | compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening |
| 1127 | parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. |
| 1128 | It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the |
| 1129 | style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". |
| 1130 | |
| 1131 | *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. |
| 1132 | Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made |
| 1133 | "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an |
| 1134 | earlier statement. An example: |
| 1135 | |
| 1136 | for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) |
| 1137 | if (a[i]) |
| 1138 | res += a[i]->offset; |
| 1139 | else |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it |
| 1142 | continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after |
| 1143 | the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's |
| 1144 | possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of |
| 1145 | the preceding "if". |
| 1146 | |
| 1147 | CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on |
| 1148 | by default. |
| 1149 | |
| 1150 | *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. |
| 1151 | Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which |
| 1152 | meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing |
| 1153 | documentation or other natural language text. |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 | The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that |
| 1156 | contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in |
| 1157 | the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline |
| 1158 | strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed |
| 1159 | to other strings that typically contain format specifications, |
| 1160 | commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses |
| 1161 | sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. |
| 1162 | |
| 1163 | *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. |
| 1164 | Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the |
| 1165 | source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in |
| 1166 | comment prefixes and paragraph starts. |
| 1167 | |
| 1168 | *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. |
| 1169 | When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment |
| 1170 | line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This |
| 1171 | change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in |
| 1172 | Pike mode only. |
| 1173 | |
| 1174 | *** Better handling of syntactic errors. |
| 1175 | The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been |
| 1176 | improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message |
| 1177 | stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the |
| 1178 | following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no |
| 1179 | matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while |
| 1180 | indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error |
| 1181 | is reported afterwards. |
| 1182 | |
| 1183 | *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. |
| 1184 | A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by |
| 1185 | returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 | *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. |
| 1188 | Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending |
| 1189 | on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now |
| 1190 | can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some |
| 1191 | code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the |
| 1192 | modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the |
| 1193 | groundwork. |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 | *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
| 1196 | This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior |
| 1197 | of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for |
| 1198 | non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might |
| 1199 | want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't |
| 1200 | have to bother. |
| 1201 | |
| 1202 | Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing |
| 1203 | situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally |
| 1204 | and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
| 1205 | If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
| 1206 | the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" |
| 1207 | by default) to override the global settings made by the user. |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 | *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
| 1210 | When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the |
| 1211 | variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now |
| 1212 | take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This |
| 1213 | is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific |
| 1214 | settings would override the global settings. This change makes it |
| 1215 | possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with |
| 1216 | Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. |
| 1217 | |
| 1218 | By default, the global value of every style variable is the new |
| 1219 | special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from |
| 1220 | the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting |
| 1221 | of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described |
| 1222 | above. |
| 1223 | |
| 1224 | Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* |
| 1225 | when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode |
| 1226 | function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a |
| 1227 | call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- |
| 1228 | then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style |
| 1229 | values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values |
| 1230 | only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the |
| 1231 | function documentation for more info. |
| 1232 | |
| 1233 | The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, |
| 1234 | especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or |
| 1235 | with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is |
| 1236 | intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, |
| 1237 | such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system |
| 1238 | is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current |
| 1239 | configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and |
| 1240 | global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. |
| 1241 | |
| 1242 | (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) |
| 1243 | |
| 1244 | **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. |
| 1245 | This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 | This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style |
| 1248 | variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be |
| 1249 | completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when |
| 1250 | the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the |
| 1251 | empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the |
| 1252 | style system. |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. |
| 1255 | In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set |
| 1256 | c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back |
| 1257 | as far as possible. |
| 1258 | |
| 1259 | *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. |
| 1260 | CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the |
| 1261 | surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new |
| 1262 | chapter about this in the manual. |
| 1263 | |
| 1264 | **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. |
| 1265 | The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly |
| 1266 | recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's |
| 1267 | primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and |
| 1268 | adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 | **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. |
| 1271 | This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable |
| 1272 | c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 | **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. |
| 1275 | This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. |
| 1276 | |
| 1277 | It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC |
| 1278 | Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). |
| 1279 | A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use |
| 1280 | inside CC Mode. |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 | Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that |
| 1283 | causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match |
| 1284 | the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is |
| 1285 | available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ |
| 1286 | cc-mode/). |
| 1287 | |
| 1288 | **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and |
| 1289 | `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and |
| 1290 | enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the |
| 1291 | function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as |
| 1292 | they were before the filling. |
| 1293 | |
| 1294 | **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. |
| 1295 | The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in |
| 1296 | specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string |
| 1297 | literals. |
| 1298 | |
| 1299 | **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. |
| 1300 | It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line |
| 1301 | prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If |
| 1302 | you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to |
| 1303 | this function. |
| 1304 | |
| 1305 | *** Fixes to IDL mode. |
| 1306 | It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant |
| 1307 | to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a |
| 1308 | struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. |
| 1309 | Thanks to Eric Eide. |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 | *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. |
| 1312 | It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when |
| 1313 | opening braces hangs and when they don't. |
| 1314 | |
| 1315 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 | *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. |
| 1318 | See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a |
| 1319 | better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, |
| 1320 | and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. |
| 1321 | |
| 1322 | *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the |
| 1323 | previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in |
| 1324 | the column specified by comment-column. |
| 1325 | |
| 1326 | *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. |
| 1327 | In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation |
| 1328 | is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line |
| 1329 | prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that |
| 1330 | contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally |
| 1331 | don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 | *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start |
| 1334 | instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup |
| 1335 | arguments. |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 | *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. |
| 1338 | |
| 1339 | *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. |
| 1340 | c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. |
| 1341 | c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are |
| 1342 | variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don |
| 1343 | Provan). |
| 1344 | |
| 1345 | *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. |
| 1346 | |
| 1347 | ** Dired changes |
| 1348 | |
| 1349 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
| 1350 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default |
| 1351 | is, delete only empty directories. |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
| 1354 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not |
| 1355 | copy directories recursively. |
| 1356 | |
| 1357 | *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
| 1358 | in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
| 1359 | the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
| 1360 | |
| 1361 | *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
| 1362 | replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or |
| 1363 | directory. |
| 1364 | |
| 1365 | *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows |
| 1366 | a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
| 1367 | This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
| 1368 | will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
| 1369 | accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
| 1370 | |
| 1371 | *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
| 1372 | from ls switches. |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 | *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
| 1375 | of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, |
| 1376 | which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single |
| 1377 | source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. |
| 1378 | |
| 1379 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 1380 | |
| 1381 | The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in |
| 1382 | four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, |
| 1383 | internationalization and mail-fetching. |
| 1384 | |
| 1385 | *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the |
| 1386 | many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. |
| 1387 | |
| 1388 | If you used procmail like in |
| 1389 | |
| 1390 | (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) |
| 1391 | (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) |
| 1392 | (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") |
| 1393 | (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") |
| 1394 | |
| 1395 | this now has changed to |
| 1396 | |
| 1397 | (setq mail-sources |
| 1398 | '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" |
| 1399 | :suffix ".in"))) |
| 1400 | |
| 1401 | More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> |
| 1402 | Getting Mail -> Mail Sources |
| 1403 | |
| 1404 | *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of |
| 1405 | Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. |
| 1406 | Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
| 1407 | longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. |
| 1408 | |
| 1409 | The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
| 1410 | use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was |
| 1411 | installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. |
| 1412 | |
| 1413 | *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
| 1414 | parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
| 1415 | are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is |
| 1416 | now just a compatibility layer. |
| 1417 | |
| 1418 | *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
| 1419 | Gnus facilities. |
| 1420 | |
| 1421 | *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be |
| 1422 | called to position point. |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 | *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in |
| 1425 | summary buffers and NOV files. |
| 1426 | |
| 1427 | *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number |
| 1428 | of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. |
| 1429 | |
| 1430 | *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a |
| 1431 | subtly different manner. |
| 1432 | |
| 1433 | *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive |
| 1434 | and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with |
| 1435 | ever-changing layouts. |
| 1436 | |
| 1437 | *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
| 1440 | |
| 1441 | ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
| 1442 | |
| 1443 | *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
| 1444 | macros |
| 1445 | |
| 1446 | Key binding Macro |
| 1447 | ------------------------- |
| 1448 | C-c C-c C-s @strong |
| 1449 | C-c C-c C-e @emph |
| 1450 | C-c C-c u @uref |
| 1451 | C-c C-c q @quotation |
| 1452 | C-c C-c m @email |
| 1453 | C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
| 1454 | M-RET @item |
| 1455 | |
| 1456 | *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
| 1457 | |
| 1458 | ** Changes in Outline mode. |
| 1459 | |
| 1460 | There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
| 1461 | `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
| 1462 | the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
| 1463 | |
| 1464 | ** Changes to Emacs Server |
| 1465 | |
| 1466 | *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
| 1467 | with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
| 1468 | are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with |
| 1469 | Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which |
| 1470 | buffers to kill, as before. |
| 1471 | |
| 1472 | Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, |
| 1473 | i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
| 1474 | this way. |
| 1475 | |
| 1476 | ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options |
| 1477 | of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. |
| 1478 | |
| 1479 | ** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
| 1480 | |
| 1481 | *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. |
| 1482 | The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to |
| 1483 | use. Default is 1000. |
| 1484 | |
| 1485 | ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
| 1486 | groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). |
| 1487 | |
| 1488 | ** Changes to hideshow.el |
| 1489 | |
| 1490 | *** Generalized block selection and traversal |
| 1491 | |
| 1492 | A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
| 1493 | and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp |
| 1494 | serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. |
| 1495 | See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. |
| 1496 | |
| 1497 | *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, |
| 1498 | hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can |
| 1499 | be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of |
| 1500 | the open block. |
| 1501 | |
| 1502 | *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a |
| 1503 | function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of |
| 1504 | the normal block-hiding function. |
| 1505 | |
| 1506 | *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. |
| 1507 | |
| 1508 | *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, |
| 1509 | roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix |
| 1510 | for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation |
| 1511 | for `hs-minor-mode'. |
| 1512 | |
| 1513 | *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and |
| 1514 | hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. |
| 1515 | |
| 1516 | ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
| 1517 | |
| 1518 | *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
| 1519 | an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
| 1520 | log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 | **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
| 1523 | current buffer. |
| 1524 | |
| 1525 | *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
| 1526 | in a log file. |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 | *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
| 1529 | entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
| 1530 | Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's |
| 1531 | version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
| 1532 | `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
| 1533 | Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
| 1534 | |
| 1535 | *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
| 1536 | |
| 1537 | ** Changes to cmuscheme |
| 1538 | |
| 1539 | *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed |
| 1540 | `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. |
| 1541 | |
| 1542 | ** Changes in Font Lock |
| 1543 | |
| 1544 | *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
| 1545 | font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
| 1546 | |
| 1547 | *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
| 1548 | set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
| 1549 | |
| 1550 | *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
| 1551 | the face used for each string/comment. |
| 1552 | |
| 1553 | *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
| 1554 | Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". |
| 1555 | |
| 1556 | ** Changes to Shell mode |
| 1557 | |
| 1558 | *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer |
| 1559 | to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a |
| 1560 | non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a |
| 1561 | prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). |
| 1562 | |
| 1563 | ** Comint (subshell) changes |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 | These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
| 1566 | include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. |
| 1567 | |
| 1568 | *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. |
| 1569 | Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and |
| 1570 | BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the |
| 1571 | beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, |
| 1572 | respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to |
| 1573 | the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. |
| 1574 | |
| 1575 | *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' |
| 1576 | to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which |
| 1577 | parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the |
| 1578 | user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use |
| 1579 | this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, |
| 1580 | respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this |
| 1581 | feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option |
| 1582 | `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. |
| 1583 | |
| 1584 | *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
| 1585 | and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
| 1586 | |
| 1587 | *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
| 1588 | buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
| 1589 | buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. |
| 1590 | |
| 1591 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like |
| 1592 | M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of |
| 1593 | the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 | *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
| 1596 | and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, |
| 1597 | see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 | *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
| 1600 | saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
| 1601 | argument, it appends to the file. |
| 1602 | |
| 1603 | *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
| 1604 | (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
| 1605 | compatibility. |
| 1606 | |
| 1607 | *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
| 1608 | ring (history). |
| 1609 | |
| 1610 | *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
| 1611 | identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
| 1612 | strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". |
| 1613 | |
| 1614 | ** Changes to Rmail mode |
| 1615 | |
| 1616 | *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
| 1617 | set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
| 1618 | receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
| 1619 | recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, |
| 1620 | `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself |
| 1621 | as correspondent. |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 | Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect |
| 1624 | mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a |
| 1625 | regexp matching your mail addresses. |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 | *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
| 1628 | to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an |
| 1629 | Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation |
| 1630 | with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask |
| 1631 | for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. |
| 1632 | |
| 1633 | *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
| 1634 | like `j'. |
| 1635 | |
| 1636 | *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
| 1637 | specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
| 1638 | digest message. |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 | *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
| 1641 | in which folder to put messages automatically. |
| 1642 | |
| 1643 | *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
| 1644 | with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly |
| 1645 | due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. |
| 1646 | |
| 1647 | ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify |
| 1648 | an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
| 1651 | use the -f option when sending mail. |
| 1652 | |
| 1653 | ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the |
| 1654 | current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in |
| 1655 | the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. |
| 1656 | This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded |
| 1657 | by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be |
| 1658 | displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. |
| 1659 | |
| 1660 | If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system |
| 1661 | other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable |
| 1662 | `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. |
| 1663 | |
| 1664 | ** Changes to TeX mode |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 | *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
| 1667 | `latex-mode'. |
| 1668 | |
| 1669 | *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
| 1670 | |
| 1671 | *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. |
| 1672 | |
| 1673 | *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. |
| 1674 | |
| 1675 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 1676 | |
| 1677 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be |
| 1678 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. |
| 1679 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default |
| 1680 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically |
| 1681 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries |
| 1682 | can be edited from that buffer. |
| 1683 | |
| 1684 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several |
| 1685 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or |
| 1686 | `A' to use all marked entries). |
| 1687 | |
| 1688 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce |
| 1689 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. |
| 1690 | |
| 1691 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' |
| 1692 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order |
| 1693 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has |
| 1694 | been cited. |
| 1695 | |
| 1696 | ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
| 1697 | The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
| 1698 | semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
| 1699 | in column 1 are always made leaves. |
| 1700 | |
| 1701 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
| 1702 | has the following new features: |
| 1703 | |
| 1704 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern |
| 1705 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like |
| 1706 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable |
| 1707 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. |
| 1708 | |
| 1709 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This |
| 1710 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source |
| 1711 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the |
| 1712 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching |
| 1713 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it |
| 1714 | defaults to 1. |
| 1715 | |
| 1716 | ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
| 1717 | file names. |
| 1718 | |
| 1719 | ** Ispell changes |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 | *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
| 1722 | transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
| 1723 | spell-checks the current buffer. |
| 1724 | |
| 1725 | *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
| 1726 | added. |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 | *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling |
| 1729 | correction is made and re-checked. |
| 1730 | |
| 1731 | *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
| 1732 | |
| 1733 | *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some |
| 1734 | cases. |
| 1735 | |
| 1736 | *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict |
| 1737 | on syntax errors. |
| 1738 | |
| 1739 | *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the |
| 1740 | end of the buffer. |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
| 1743 | |
| 1744 | ** Makefile mode changes |
| 1745 | |
| 1746 | *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. |
| 1747 | |
| 1748 | *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
| 1749 | Fontlock mode is active. |
| 1750 | |
| 1751 | ** Isearch changes |
| 1752 | |
| 1753 | *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
| 1754 | so that searches can be resumed. |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 | *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
| 1757 | respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
| 1758 | that started the search. |
| 1759 | |
| 1760 | *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
| 1761 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
| 1762 | |
| 1763 | *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
| 1764 | |
| 1765 | Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
| 1766 | `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
| 1767 | search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as |
| 1768 | before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are |
| 1769 | highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to |
| 1770 | `secondary-selection'. |
| 1771 | |
| 1772 | The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor |
| 1773 | will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. |
| 1774 | Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion |
| 1775 | using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its |
| 1776 | usual snappy response. |
| 1777 | |
| 1778 | If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for |
| 1779 | matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is |
| 1780 | set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x |
| 1781 | isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. |
| 1782 | |
| 1783 | ** VC Changes |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 | VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it |
| 1786 | easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp |
| 1787 | Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism |
| 1788 | to enable and disable support for particular version systems has |
| 1789 | changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable |
| 1790 | `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
| 1791 | version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
| 1792 | each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the |
| 1793 | file is registered in that backend. |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed |
| 1796 | backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the |
| 1797 | directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for |
| 1798 | master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then |
| 1799 | the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. |
| 1800 | As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. |
| 1801 | |
| 1802 | The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC |
| 1803 | still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for |
| 1804 | RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables |
| 1805 | vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS |
| 1806 | where it doesn't make sense.) |
| 1807 | |
| 1808 | The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also |
| 1809 | obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude |
| 1810 | `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. |
| 1811 | |
| 1812 | *** General Changes |
| 1813 | |
| 1814 | The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding |
| 1815 | checks are always done now. |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 | VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
| 1818 | operations. |
| 1819 | |
| 1820 | `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
| 1821 | `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. |
| 1822 | `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. |
| 1823 | |
| 1824 | The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
| 1825 | first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the |
| 1826 | current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into |
| 1827 | the working file (``merge news''). |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
| 1830 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work |
| 1831 | downwards. |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | *** Multiple Backends |
| 1834 | |
| 1835 | VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is |
| 1836 | useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS |
| 1837 | repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally |
| 1838 | commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your |
| 1839 | local RCS archives. |
| 1840 | |
| 1841 | To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) |
| 1842 | should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' |
| 1843 | backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of |
| 1844 | `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) |
| 1845 | |
| 1846 | You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
| 1847 | C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as |
| 1848 | a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend |
| 1849 | if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the |
| 1850 | current revision number from the more remote backend. |
| 1851 | |
| 1852 | If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to |
| 1853 | another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change |
| 1854 | any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to |
| 1855 | pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 | After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your |
| 1858 | changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the |
| 1859 | local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry |
| 1860 | buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 | *** Changes for CVS |
| 1863 | |
| 1864 | There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the |
| 1865 | default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in |
| 1866 | remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined |
| 1867 | by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a |
| 1868 | regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts |
| 1869 | that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC |
| 1870 | queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. |
| 1871 | |
| 1872 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
| 1873 | repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and |
| 1874 | revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without |
| 1875 | any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version |
| 1876 | backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version |
| 1877 | number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ |
| 1878 | (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter |
| 1879 | of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, |
| 1880 | the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted |
| 1881 | automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
| 1882 | since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file |
| 1883 | name.) |
| 1884 | |
| 1885 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
| 1886 | repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. |
| 1887 | If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to |
| 1888 | commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
| 1889 | current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
| 1890 | entire directory tree. |
| 1891 | |
| 1892 | The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call |
| 1893 | "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option |
| 1894 | is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are |
| 1895 | "watched" by other developers.) |
| 1896 | |
| 1897 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
| 1898 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give |
| 1899 | an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
| 1900 | starting at the given directory. |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 | *** Lisp Changes in VC |
| 1903 | |
| 1904 | VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now |
| 1905 | add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a |
| 1906 | library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and |
| 1907 | then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for |
| 1908 | a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
| 1909 | provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top |
| 1910 | of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
| 1911 | you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
| 1912 | `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. |
| 1913 | |
| 1914 | ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
| 1915 | SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
| 1916 | terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. |
| 1917 | See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. |
| 1918 | |
| 1919 | ** New modes and packages |
| 1920 | |
| 1921 | *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
| 1922 | automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when |
| 1923 | the default is not applicable. |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 | *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
| 1926 | rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The |
| 1927 | shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. |
| 1928 | |
| 1929 | Features are: |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 | - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is |
| 1932 | drawn, like this: | \ / |
| 1933 | --+-- X |
| 1934 | | / \ |
| 1935 | |
| 1936 | - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the |
| 1937 | result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If |
| 1938 | your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a |
| 1939 | pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will |
| 1940 | then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line |
| 1941 | you are drawing. |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) |
| 1944 | poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. |
| 1945 | |
| 1946 | - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by |
| 1947 | flood-filling. |
| 1948 | |
| 1949 | - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular |
| 1950 | regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be |
| 1951 | turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in |
| 1952 | artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. |
| 1953 | |
| 1954 | - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
| 1955 | also do without the mouse. |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to |
| 1958 | reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares |
| 1959 | and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your |
| 1960 | ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, |
| 1961 | the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 | - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 | lines straight-lines |
| 1966 | rectangles squares |
| 1967 | poly-lines straight poly-lines |
| 1968 | ellipses circles |
| 1969 | text (see-thru) text (overwrite) |
| 1970 | spray-can setting size for spraying |
| 1971 | vaporize line vaporize lines |
| 1972 | erase characters erase rectangles |
| 1973 | |
| 1974 | Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or |
| 1975 | diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in |
| 1976 | the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while |
| 1977 | drawing. |
| 1978 | |
| 1979 | It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines |
| 1980 | (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are |
| 1981 | straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired |
| 1982 | by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. |
| 1983 | |
| 1984 | - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this |
| 1985 | can be turned off). |
| 1986 | |
| 1987 | *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
| 1988 | implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. |
| 1989 | It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp |
| 1990 | functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports |
| 1991 | history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It |
| 1992 | will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of |
| 1993 | the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been |
| 1994 | rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, |
| 1995 | all within the scope of your Emacs process. |
| 1996 | |
| 1997 | *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
| 1998 | intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the |
| 1999 | typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working |
| 2000 | on certain projects. |
| 2001 | |
| 2002 | *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
| 2003 | of interactively entered regexps. For example, |
| 2004 | |
| 2005 | M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
| 2006 | |
| 2007 | will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background |
| 2008 | face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are |
| 2009 | typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. |
| 2010 | Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of |
| 2011 | appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the |
| 2012 | current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the |
| 2013 | corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
| 2014 | to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. |
| 2015 | |
| 2016 | *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
| 2017 | Emacs is idle. |
| 2018 | |
| 2019 | *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text |
| 2020 | fragments in accordance with the current major mode. |
| 2021 | |
| 2022 | *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
| 2023 | parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. |
| 2024 | |
| 2025 | *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
| 2026 | package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
| 2027 | be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
| 2028 | `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
| 2029 | comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. |
| 2030 | |
| 2031 | *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
| 2032 | facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a |
| 2033 | separate Texinfo file. |
| 2034 | |
| 2035 | *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or |
| 2036 | by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) |
| 2037 | provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with |
| 2038 | `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to |
| 2039 | enter check-in log messages. |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 | *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
| 2042 | without invoking external programs. |
| 2043 | |
| 2044 | The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp |
| 2045 | and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike |
| 2046 | `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it |
| 2047 | is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and |
| 2048 | Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
| 2049 | |
| 2050 | The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man |
| 2051 | page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
| 2054 | authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. |
| 2055 | |
| 2056 | The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for |
| 2057 | the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in |
| 2058 | the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. |
| 2059 | Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so |
| 2060 | even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a |
| 2061 | single step. |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like |
| 2064 | matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will |
| 2065 | probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp |
| 2066 | contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. |
| 2067 | |
| 2068 | *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
| 2069 | unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without |
| 2070 | actually modifying content of a buffer. |
| 2071 | |
| 2072 | *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
| 2073 | PostScript. |
| 2074 | |
| 2075 | Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. |
| 2076 | |
| 2077 | The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: |
| 2078 | |
| 2079 | ; comment (until end of line) |
| 2080 | A non-terminal |
| 2081 | "C" terminal |
| 2082 | ?C? special |
| 2083 | $A default non-terminal |
| 2084 | $"C" default terminal |
| 2085 | $?C? default special |
| 2086 | A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) |
| 2087 | C D sequence (C occurs before D) |
| 2088 | C | D alternative (C or D occurs) |
| 2089 | A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) |
| 2090 | n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) |
| 2091 | (C) group (expression C is grouped together) |
| 2092 | [C] optional (C may or not occurs) |
| 2093 | C+ one or more occurrences of C |
| 2094 | {C}+ one or more occurrences of C |
| 2095 | {C}* zero or more occurrences of C |
| 2096 | {C} zero or more occurrences of C |
| 2097 | C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* |
| 2098 | {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* |
| 2099 | {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
| 2100 | {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
| 2101 | |
| 2102 | Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. |
| 2103 | |
| 2104 | *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
| 2105 | align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, |
| 2106 | determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for |
| 2107 | example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the |
| 2108 | equal signs of assignments. |
| 2109 | |
| 2110 | *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
| 2111 | paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
| 2112 | |
| 2113 | *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
| 2114 | list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a |
| 2115 | buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
| 2116 | |
| 2117 | *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
| 2118 | |
| 2119 | *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
| 2120 | replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it |
| 2121 | is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, |
| 2122 | and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should |
| 2123 | not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool |
| 2124 | which answers different needs. |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 | *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
| 2127 | suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
| 2128 | expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
| 2129 | course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
| 2130 | reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
| 2131 | to be enabled. |
| 2132 | |
| 2133 | *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
| 2134 | containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
| 2135 | |
| 2136 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
| 2137 | |
| 2138 | *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the |
| 2139 | current line in the current buffer. It also provides |
| 2140 | `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behaviour in all buffers. |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. |
| 2143 | |
| 2144 | Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
| 2145 | `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
| 2146 | disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to |
| 2147 | `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This |
| 2148 | displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground |
| 2149 | and background colors. |
| 2150 | |
| 2151 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
| 2152 | Pascal) language. |
| 2153 | |
| 2154 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
| 2155 | the text at point. |
| 2156 | |
| 2157 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
| 2160 | |
| 2161 | *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
| 2162 | whitespace in a file. |
| 2163 | |
| 2164 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
| 2165 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including |
| 2166 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for |
| 2167 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and |
| 2168 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / |
| 2169 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal |
| 2170 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. |
| 2171 | |
| 2172 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. |
| 2173 | |
| 2174 | Here is an example of columns: |
| 2175 | |
| 2176 | horse apple bus |
| 2177 | dog pineapple car EXTRA |
| 2178 | porcupine strawberry airplane |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 | Doing the following settings: |
| 2181 | |
| 2182 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") |
| 2183 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") |
| 2184 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") |
| 2185 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") |
| 2186 | |
| 2187 | |
| 2188 | Selecting the lines above and typing: |
| 2189 | |
| 2190 | M-x delimit-columns-region |
| 2191 | |
| 2192 | It results: |
| 2193 | |
| 2194 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] |
| 2195 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] |
| 2196 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] |
| 2197 | |
| 2198 | delim-col has the following options: |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted |
| 2201 | before all columns. |
| 2202 | |
| 2203 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted |
| 2204 | between each column. |
| 2205 | |
| 2206 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted |
| 2207 | after all columns. |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates |
| 2210 | each column. |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 | delim-col has the following commands: |
| 2213 | |
| 2214 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. |
| 2215 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. |
| 2216 | |
| 2217 | *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
| 2218 | operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a |
| 2219 | menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the |
| 2220 | recent file list can be displayed: |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 | - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
| 2223 | - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
| 2224 | - showing paths relative to the current default-directory |
| 2225 | |
| 2226 | The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
| 2227 | dynamically change the menu appearance. |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
| 2230 | text. |
| 2231 | |
| 2232 | *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
| 2233 | of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
| 2234 | specific to Message mode. |
| 2235 | |
| 2236 | *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
| 2237 | viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files |
| 2238 | with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. |
| 2239 | |
| 2240 | *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
| 2241 | interface to access directory servers using different directory |
| 2242 | protocols. It has a separate manual. |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 | *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
| 2245 | for Autoconf, selected automatically. |
| 2246 | |
| 2247 | *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
| 2248 | |
| 2249 | *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
| 2250 | minibuffer with completion. |
| 2251 | |
| 2252 | *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
| 2253 | with the diary features. |
| 2254 | |
| 2255 | *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
| 2256 | numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. |
| 2257 | |
| 2258 | *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
| 2259 | Fill mode. |
| 2260 | |
| 2261 | *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
| 2262 | facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main |
| 2263 | difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning |
| 2264 | they can be profiled, debugged, etc. |
| 2265 | |
| 2266 | *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. |
| 2267 | It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension |
| 2268 | `.g'. |
| 2269 | |
| 2270 | ** Changes in sort.el |
| 2271 | |
| 2272 | The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
| 2273 | as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
| 2274 | new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
| 2275 | numeric base. |
| 2276 | |
| 2277 | ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
| 2278 | |
| 2279 | *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
| 2280 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
| 2281 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) |
| 2282 | |
| 2283 | *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
| 2284 | ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. |
| 2285 | |
| 2286 | *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
| 2287 | output ^M at the end of lines. |
| 2288 | |
| 2289 | ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor |
| 2290 | mode `iswitchb-mode'. |
| 2291 | |
| 2292 | ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
| 2293 | If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with |
| 2294 | `(msb-mode 1)'. |
| 2295 | |
| 2296 | ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
| 2297 | group. |
| 2298 | |
| 2299 | ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
| 2300 | behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values |
| 2301 | are recognized: |
| 2302 | |
| 2303 | `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; |
| 2304 | `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; |
| 2305 | `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; |
| 2306 | nil -- just delete one character. |
| 2307 | |
| 2308 | Default value is `untabify'. |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 | [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
| 2311 | |
| 2312 | ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
| 2313 | symbol, not double-quoted. |
| 2314 | |
| 2315 | ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
| 2316 | version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
| 2317 | profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been |
| 2318 | moved to lisp/obsolete. |
| 2319 | |
| 2320 | ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
| 2321 | To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the |
| 2322 | `auto-compression-mode' command. |
| 2323 | |
| 2324 | ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
| 2325 | `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and |
| 2326 | `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. |
| 2327 | |
| 2328 | ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to |
| 2329 | `browse-url-new-window-flag'. |
| 2330 | |
| 2331 | ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
| 2332 | operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. |
| 2333 | |
| 2334 | ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
| 2335 | is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 | ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
| 2338 | support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
| 2339 | use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the |
| 2340 | buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands |
| 2341 | M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a |
| 2342 | new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 | ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
| 2345 | a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. |
| 2346 | |
| 2347 | ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 | The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the |
| 2350 | file you are visiting in Hexl mode. |
| 2351 | |
| 2352 | ** Shell script mode changes. |
| 2353 | |
| 2354 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells |
| 2355 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
| 2356 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
| 2357 | |
| 2358 | ** Etags changes. |
| 2359 | |
| 2360 | *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. |
| 2361 | |
| 2362 | *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
| 2363 | possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
| 2364 | {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
| 2365 | This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
| 2366 | a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
| 2367 | |
| 2368 | *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
| 2369 | declarations when given the --declarations option. |
| 2370 | |
| 2371 | *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form |
| 2372 | "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
| 2373 | |
| 2374 | *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
| 2375 | automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
| 2376 | `template' keywords. |
| 2377 | |
| 2378 | *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in |
| 2379 | C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. |
| 2380 | |
| 2381 | *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
| 2382 | types. |
| 2383 | |
| 2384 | *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 | *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". |
| 2387 | |
| 2388 | *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs |
| 2389 | are now tagged. |
| 2390 | |
| 2391 | *** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
| 2392 | |
| 2393 | *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
| 2394 | variables are tagged. |
| 2395 | |
| 2396 | *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. |
| 2397 | |
| 2398 | *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
| 2399 | for PSWrap. |
| 2400 | |
| 2401 | ** Changes in etags.el |
| 2402 | |
| 2403 | *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
| 2404 | tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default |
| 2405 | is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. |
| 2406 | |
| 2407 | *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
| 2408 | the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
| 2409 | |
| 2410 | If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
| 2411 | FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
| 2412 | TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
| 2413 | obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 | TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
| 2416 | |
| 2417 | FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
| 2418 | List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
| 2419 | |
| 2420 | A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
| 2421 | |
| 2422 | '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
| 2423 | ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
| 2424 | ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
| 2425 | |
| 2426 | *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
| 2427 | of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
| 2428 | |
| 2429 | *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
| 2430 | names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
| 2431 | |
| 2432 | *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
| 2433 | If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c |
| 2434 | /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", |
| 2435 | "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, |
| 2436 | point will go to the beginning of the file. |
| 2437 | |
| 2438 | *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if |
| 2439 | auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search |
| 2440 | (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. |
| 2441 | |
| 2442 | *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point |
| 2443 | in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is |
| 2444 | found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. |
| 2445 | |
| 2446 | ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
| 2447 | remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
| 2448 | appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. |
| 2449 | |
| 2450 | ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. |
| 2451 | |
| 2452 | ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
| 2453 | |
| 2454 | ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
| 2455 | containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
| 2456 | expression from that list, are not checked. |
| 2457 | |
| 2458 | ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
| 2459 | When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
| 2460 | and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
| 2461 | the buffer, just like for the local files. |
| 2462 | |
| 2463 | ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
| 2464 | |
| 2465 | ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
| 2466 | displays local abbrevs, only. |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 | ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping |
| 2469 | paragraphs filled as you modify them. |
| 2470 | |
| 2471 | ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse |
| 2472 | may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value |
| 2473 | is measured in pixels. |
| 2474 | |
| 2475 | ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files |
| 2476 | to be visited as images. |
| 2477 | |
| 2478 | ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' |
| 2479 | were added to compile.el. |
| 2480 | |
| 2481 | ** Withdrawn packages |
| 2482 | |
| 2483 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same |
| 2484 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. |
| 2485 | |
| 2486 | *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 | *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. |
| 2489 | |
| 2490 | \f |
| 2491 | * Incompatible Lisp changes |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 | There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and |
| 2494 | may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. |
| 2495 | See the sections below for details. |
| 2496 | |
| 2497 | ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
| 2498 | `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
| 2499 | Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' |
| 2500 | to remove the properties of the copy. |
| 2501 | |
| 2502 | ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code |
| 2503 | which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) |
| 2504 | may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from |
| 2505 | these properties are active. |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 | ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
| 2508 | ranges may affect some code. |
| 2509 | |
| 2510 | ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook |
| 2511 | buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might |
| 2512 | make a difference to some code. |
| 2513 | |
| 2514 | ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
| 2515 | operates on the minibuffer. |
| 2516 | |
| 2517 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
| 2518 | cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce |
| 2519 | different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters |
| 2520 | (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). |
| 2521 | Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate |
| 2522 | character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading |
| 2523 | multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE |
| 2524 | encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program |
| 2525 | reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte |
| 2526 | sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as |
| 2527 | a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in |
| 2528 | the buffer as multibyte characters. |
| 2529 | |
| 2530 | Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal |
| 2531 | MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only |
| 2532 | appropriate for reading truly binary files. |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 | ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
| 2535 | `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
| 2536 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. |
| 2537 | |
| 2538 | ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as |
| 2539 | long promised. |
| 2540 | |
| 2541 | ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte |
| 2542 | string. |
| 2543 | |
| 2544 | ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
| 2545 | extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new |
| 2546 | dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than |
| 2547 | one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard |
| 2548 | charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes |
| 2549 | the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule |
| 2550 | encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
| 2551 | probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 | ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
| 2554 | Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be |
| 2555 | aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should |
| 2556 | not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and |
| 2557 | on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the |
| 2558 | behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It |
| 2559 | turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to |
| 2560 | remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well |
| 2561 | advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value |
| 2562 | will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 | \f |
| 2565 | * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
| 2566 | (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) |
| 2567 | |
| 2568 | ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. |
| 2569 | |
| 2570 | ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el |
| 2571 | allows the animated display of strings. |
| 2572 | |
| 2573 | ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
| 2574 | interactive form of a function. |
| 2575 | |
| 2576 | ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
| 2577 | between custom options. Example: |
| 2578 | |
| 2579 | (defcustom default-input-method nil |
| 2580 | "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
| 2581 | This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
| 2582 | `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
| 2583 | :group 'mule |
| 2584 | :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
| 2585 | :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
| 2586 | |
| 2587 | This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
| 2588 | current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
| 2589 | first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
| 2590 | |
| 2591 | ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
| 2592 | function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
| 2593 | args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated |
| 2594 | (signal or normal termination). |
| 2595 | |
| 2596 | ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
| 2597 | from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. |
| 2598 | |
| 2599 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
| 2600 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
| 2601 | |
| 2602 | ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
| 2603 | alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. |
| 2604 | |
| 2605 | ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
| 2606 | |
| 2607 | ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
| 2608 | deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame |
| 2609 | being deleted. |
| 2610 | |
| 2611 | ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
| 2612 | |
| 2613 | ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
| 2614 | If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
| 2615 | skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends |
| 2616 | with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is |
| 2617 | C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's |
| 2618 | charset. |
| 2619 | |
| 2620 | ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
| 2621 | the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the |
| 2622 | message. |
| 2623 | |
| 2624 | ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
| 2625 | expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. |
| 2626 | |
| 2627 | ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
| 2628 | with the more general `:mask' property. |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 | ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
| 2631 | |
| 2632 | ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
| 2633 | backslash. |
| 2634 | |
| 2635 | ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
| 2636 | is running in batch mode. For example, |
| 2637 | |
| 2638 | (message "%s" (read t)) |
| 2639 | |
| 2640 | will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
| 2641 | to standard output. |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 | ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', |
| 2644 | `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. |
| 2645 | |
| 2646 | ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
| 2647 | will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new |
| 2648 | frame or window. |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 | ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
| 2651 | were added |
| 2652 | |
| 2653 | - Function: remove ELT SEQ |
| 2654 | |
| 2655 | Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
| 2656 | a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
| 2657 | |
| 2658 | - Function: remq ELT LIST |
| 2659 | |
| 2660 | Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
| 2661 | comparison is done with `eq'. |
| 2662 | |
| 2663 | ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
| 2664 | |
| 2665 | ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
| 2666 | has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and |
| 2667 | `key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. |
| 2668 | |
| 2669 | ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
| 2670 | without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may |
| 2671 | convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. |
| 2672 | |
| 2673 | ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
| 2674 | or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. |
| 2675 | |
| 2676 | ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
| 2677 | function was declared obsolete. |
| 2678 | |
| 2679 | ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
| 2680 | retained as an alias). |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 | ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
| 2683 | It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
| 2684 | is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
| 2685 | |
| 2686 | ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
| 2687 | |
| 2688 | - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
| 2689 | |
| 2690 | Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or |
| 2691 | omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use |
| 2692 | the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, |
| 2693 | even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the |
| 2694 | minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t |
| 2695 | means never include the minibuffer window. |
| 2696 | |
| 2697 | ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows |
| 2698 | |
| 2699 | - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT |
| 2700 | |
| 2701 | Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. |
| 2702 | |
| 2703 | This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', |
| 2704 | calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as |
| 2705 | argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil |
| 2706 | value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is |
| 2707 | returned. |
| 2708 | |
| 2709 | Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even |
| 2710 | if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff |
| 2711 | it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the |
| 2712 | minibuffer even if it is active. |
| 2713 | |
| 2714 | Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer |
| 2715 | counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count |
| 2716 | too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame |
| 2717 | and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, |
| 2718 | `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you |
| 2719 | entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. |
| 2720 | |
| 2721 | ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. |
| 2722 | ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. |
| 2723 | ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. |
| 2724 | ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. |
| 2725 | ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. |
| 2726 | If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. |
| 2727 | Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. |
| 2728 | |
| 2729 | ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
| 2730 | event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional |
| 2731 | argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 | ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
| 2734 | call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that |
| 2735 | message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
| 2736 | Default value is nil. |
| 2737 | |
| 2738 | ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
| 2739 | meaning no limit. |
| 2740 | |
| 2741 | ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls |
| 2742 | the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line |
| 2743 | numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. |
| 2744 | |
| 2745 | ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
| 2746 | coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
| 2747 | DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, |
| 2748 | |
| 2749 | ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument |
| 2750 | list of a primitive. |
| 2751 | |
| 2752 | ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
| 2753 | |
| 2754 | ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
| 2755 | buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. |
| 2756 | This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather |
| 2757 | than replacing the local map. |
| 2758 | |
| 2759 | ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
| 2760 | `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been |
| 2761 | removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' |
| 2762 | instead. |
| 2763 | |
| 2764 | ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. |
| 2765 | |
| 2766 | ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
| 2767 | as promised long ago. |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 | ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
| 2770 | |
| 2771 | ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems |
| 2772 | for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but |
| 2773 | patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. |
| 2774 | |
| 2775 | \f |
| 2776 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
| 2777 | |
| 2778 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. |
| 2779 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. |
| 2780 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
| 2781 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. |
| 2782 | |
| 2783 | ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for |
| 2784 | regular expressions. |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 | - Function: rx-to-string SEXP |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
| 2789 | |
| 2790 | - Macro: rx SEXP |
| 2791 | |
| 2792 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
| 2793 | |
| 2794 | The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp |
| 2795 | notation. |
| 2796 | |
| 2797 | STRING |
| 2798 | matches string STRING literally. |
| 2799 | |
| 2800 | CHAR |
| 2801 | matches character CHAR literally. |
| 2802 | |
| 2803 | `not-newline' |
| 2804 | matches any character except a newline. |
| 2805 | . |
| 2806 | `anything' |
| 2807 | matches any character |
| 2808 | |
| 2809 | `(any SET)' |
| 2810 | matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. |
| 2811 | Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. |
| 2812 | |
| 2813 | '(in SET)' |
| 2814 | like `any'. |
| 2815 | |
| 2816 | `(not (any SET))' |
| 2817 | matches any character not in SET |
| 2818 | |
| 2819 | `line-start' |
| 2820 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line |
| 2821 | in the text being matched |
| 2822 | |
| 2823 | `line-end' |
| 2824 | is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line |
| 2825 | |
| 2826 | `string-start' |
| 2827 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
| 2828 | string being matched against. |
| 2829 | |
| 2830 | `string-end' |
| 2831 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
| 2832 | string being matched against. |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 | `buffer-start' |
| 2835 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
| 2836 | buffer being matched against. |
| 2837 | |
| 2838 | `buffer-end' |
| 2839 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
| 2840 | buffer being matched against. |
| 2841 | |
| 2842 | `point' |
| 2843 | matches the empty string, but only at point. |
| 2844 | |
| 2845 | `word-start' |
| 2846 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
| 2847 | word. |
| 2848 | |
| 2849 | `word-end' |
| 2850 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 | `word-boundary' |
| 2853 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
| 2854 | word. |
| 2855 | |
| 2856 | `(not word-boundary)' |
| 2857 | matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a |
| 2858 | word. |
| 2859 | |
| 2860 | `digit' |
| 2861 | matches 0 through 9. |
| 2862 | |
| 2863 | `control' |
| 2864 | matches ASCII control characters. |
| 2865 | |
| 2866 | `hex-digit' |
| 2867 | matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
| 2868 | |
| 2869 | `blank' |
| 2870 | matches space and tab only. |
| 2871 | |
| 2872 | `graphic' |
| 2873 | matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
| 2874 | space, and DEL. |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 | `printing' |
| 2877 | matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
| 2878 | and DEL. |
| 2879 | |
| 2880 | `alphanumeric' |
| 2881 | matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 2882 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 2883 | |
| 2884 | `letter' |
| 2885 | matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 2886 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 2887 | |
| 2888 | `ascii' |
| 2889 | matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
| 2890 | |
| 2891 | `nonascii' |
| 2892 | matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
| 2893 | |
| 2894 | `lower' |
| 2895 | matches anything lower-case. |
| 2896 | |
| 2897 | `upper' |
| 2898 | matches anything upper-case. |
| 2899 | |
| 2900 | `punctuation' |
| 2901 | matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 2902 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
| 2903 | |
| 2904 | `space' |
| 2905 | matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
| 2906 | |
| 2907 | `word' |
| 2908 | matches anything that has word syntax. |
| 2909 | |
| 2910 | `(syntax SYNTAX)' |
| 2911 | matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one |
| 2912 | of the following symbols. |
| 2913 | |
| 2914 | `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) |
| 2915 | `punctuation' (\\s.) |
| 2916 | `word' (\\sw) |
| 2917 | `symbol' (\\s_) |
| 2918 | `open-parenthesis' (\\s() |
| 2919 | `close-parenthesis' (\\s)) |
| 2920 | `expression-prefix' (\\s') |
| 2921 | `string-quote' (\\s\") |
| 2922 | `paired-delimiter' (\\s$) |
| 2923 | `escape' (\\s\\) |
| 2924 | `character-quote' (\\s/) |
| 2925 | `comment-start' (\\s<) |
| 2926 | `comment-end' (\\s>) |
| 2927 | |
| 2928 | `(not (syntax SYNTAX))' |
| 2929 | matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. |
| 2930 | |
| 2931 | `(category CATEGORY)' |
| 2932 | matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be |
| 2933 | either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. |
| 2934 | |
| 2935 | `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) |
| 2936 | `base-vowel' (\\c1) |
| 2937 | `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) |
| 2938 | `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) |
| 2939 | `tone-mark' (\\c4) |
| 2940 | `symbol' (\\c5) |
| 2941 | `digit' (\\c6) |
| 2942 | `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) |
| 2943 | `vowel-sign' (\\c8) |
| 2944 | `semivowel-lower' (\\c9) |
| 2945 | `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) |
| 2946 | `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) |
| 2947 | `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) |
| 2948 | `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) |
| 2949 | `greek-two-byte' (\\cG) |
| 2950 | `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) |
| 2951 | `indian-tow-byte' (\\cI) |
| 2952 | `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) |
| 2953 | `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) |
| 2954 | `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) |
| 2955 | `ascii' (\\ca) |
| 2956 | `arabic' (\\cb) |
| 2957 | `chinese' (\\cc) |
| 2958 | `ethiopic' (\\ce) |
| 2959 | `greek' (\\cg) |
| 2960 | `korean' (\\ch) |
| 2961 | `indian' (\\ci) |
| 2962 | `japanese' (\\cj) |
| 2963 | `japanese-katakana' (\\ck) |
| 2964 | `latin' (\\cl) |
| 2965 | `lao' (\\co) |
| 2966 | `tibetan' (\\cq) |
| 2967 | `japanese-roman' (\\cr) |
| 2968 | `thai' (\\ct) |
| 2969 | `vietnamese' (\\cv) |
| 2970 | `hebrew' (\\cw) |
| 2971 | `cyrillic' (\\cy) |
| 2972 | `can-break' (\\c|) |
| 2973 | |
| 2974 | `(not (category CATEGORY))' |
| 2975 | matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. |
| 2976 | |
| 2977 | `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
| 2978 | matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. |
| 2979 | |
| 2980 | `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
| 2981 | like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', |
| 2982 | `match-beginning', and `match-string'. |
| 2983 | |
| 2984 | `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
| 2985 | another name for `submatch'. |
| 2986 | |
| 2987 | `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
| 2988 | matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all |
| 2989 | args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting |
| 2990 | regular expression. |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 | `(minimal-match SEXP)' |
| 2993 | produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching |
| 2994 | zero or more occurrances of something are \"greedy\" in that they |
| 2995 | match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can |
| 2996 | still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 | `(maximal-match SEXP)' |
| 2999 | produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. |
| 3000 | |
| 3001 | `(zero-or-more SEXP)' |
| 3002 | matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
| 3003 | |
| 3004 | `(0+ SEXP)' |
| 3005 | like `zero-or-more'. |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 | `(* SEXP)' |
| 3008 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 | `(*? SEXP)' |
| 3011 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
| 3012 | |
| 3013 | `(one-or-more SEXP)' |
| 3014 | matches one or more occurrences of A. |
| 3015 | |
| 3016 | `(1+ SEXP)' |
| 3017 | like `one-or-more'. |
| 3018 | |
| 3019 | `(+ SEXP)' |
| 3020 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
| 3021 | |
| 3022 | `(+? SEXP)' |
| 3023 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
| 3024 | |
| 3025 | `(zero-or-one SEXP)' |
| 3026 | matches zero or one occurrences of A. |
| 3027 | |
| 3028 | `(optional SEXP)' |
| 3029 | like `zero-or-one'. |
| 3030 | |
| 3031 | `(? SEXP)' |
| 3032 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
| 3033 | |
| 3034 | `(?? SEXP)' |
| 3035 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
| 3036 | |
| 3037 | `(repeat N SEXP)' |
| 3038 | matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
| 3039 | |
| 3040 | `(repeat N M SEXP)' |
| 3041 | matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
| 3042 | |
| 3043 | `(eval FORM)' |
| 3044 | evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, |
| 3045 | `regexp-quote' it. |
| 3046 | |
| 3047 | `(regexp REGEXP)' |
| 3048 | include REGEXP in string notation in the result. |
| 3049 | |
| 3050 | *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
| 3051 | |
| 3052 | *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
| 3053 | buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside |
| 3054 | the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved |
| 3055 | restriction to be restored incorrectly. |
| 3056 | |
| 3057 | *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
| 3058 | `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list |
| 3059 | when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
| 3060 | multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 | *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and |
| 3063 | `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string |
| 3064 | if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 | *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is |
| 3067 | changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern |
| 3068 | [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character |
| 3069 | regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if |
| 3070 | the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the |
| 3071 | extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra |
| 3072 | bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset |
| 3073 | eight-bit-graphic. |
| 3074 | |
| 3075 | ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 | A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
| 3078 | a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
| 3079 | character set as previously. |
| 3080 | |
| 3081 | *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. |
| 3082 | They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function |
| 3083 | modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. |
| 3084 | |
| 3085 | CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic |
| 3086 | characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the |
| 3087 | range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that |
| 3088 | case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. |
| 3089 | |
| 3090 | FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family |
| 3091 | name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
| 3092 | |
| 3093 | *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset |
| 3094 | registries of character sets are set in the default fontset |
| 3095 | "fontset-default". |
| 3096 | |
| 3097 | *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second |
| 3098 | argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. |
| 3099 | |
| 3100 | ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character |
| 3101 | composition is done by a special text property `composition' in |
| 3102 | buffers and strings. |
| 3103 | |
| 3104 | *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite |
| 3105 | character' which is an independent character with a unique character |
| 3106 | code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' |
| 3107 | have been deleted: composite-char-component, |
| 3108 | composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, |
| 3109 | composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. |
| 3110 | The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have |
| 3111 | also been deleted. |
| 3112 | |
| 3113 | *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to |
| 3114 | specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable |
| 3115 | `reference-point-alist' for more detail. |
| 3116 | |
| 3117 | *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and |
| 3118 | MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a |
| 3119 | composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters |
| 3120 | may differ between buffer and string text. |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 | *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, |
| 3123 | COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. |
| 3124 | |
| 3125 | *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' |
| 3126 | directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. |
| 3127 | Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property |
| 3128 | `composition' from STRING. |
| 3129 | |
| 3130 | *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about |
| 3131 | a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. |
| 3132 | |
| 3133 | *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as |
| 3134 | obsolete. |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 | ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
| 3137 | the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. |
| 3138 | |
| 3139 | ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
| 3140 | `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
| 3141 | introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, |
| 3142 | U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. |
| 3143 | |
| 3144 | Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so |
| 3145 | characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, |
| 3146 | etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are |
| 3147 | different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text |
| 3148 | which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be |
| 3149 | encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. |
| 3150 | |
| 3151 | ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. |
| 3152 | It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For |
| 3153 | details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. |
| 3154 | |
| 3155 | ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
| 3156 | `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
| 3157 | standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. |
| 3158 | |
| 3159 | ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' |
| 3160 | have been introduced. |
| 3161 | |
| 3162 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
| 3163 | have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
| 3164 | 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
| 3165 | eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the |
| 3166 | emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the |
| 3167 | buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
| 3168 | eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string |
| 3169 | must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to |
| 3170 | their multibyte equivalent. |
| 3171 | |
| 3172 | ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
| 3173 | that offset in the file before writing. |
| 3174 | |
| 3175 | ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
| 3176 | compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
| 3177 | |
| 3178 | ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
| 3179 | `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer |
| 3180 | from which the command was issued. |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 | ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', |
| 3183 | `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', |
| 3184 | `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two |
| 3185 | additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to |
| 3186 | operate on. |
| 3187 | |
| 3188 | ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
| 3189 | to `window-buffer-height'. |
| 3190 | |
| 3191 | - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW |
| 3192 | |
| 3193 | Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. |
| 3194 | The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual |
| 3195 | lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. |
| 3196 | |
| 3197 | Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' |
| 3198 | respectively. |
| 3199 | |
| 3200 | If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
| 3201 | COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 | The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for |
| 3204 | obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so |
| 3205 | on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. |
| 3206 | |
| 3207 | Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current |
| 3208 | buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes |
| 3209 | possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it |
| 3210 | is currently displayed in some window. |
| 3211 | |
| 3212 | ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
| 3213 | argument function's results. |
| 3214 | |
| 3215 | ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
| 3216 | signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, |
| 3217 | `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs |
| 3218 | 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte |
| 3219 | sequence). |
| 3220 | |
| 3221 | ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
| 3222 | header in the list of headers passed to it. |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 | ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but |
| 3225 | ignores differences in case and text representation. |
| 3226 | |
| 3227 | ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the |
| 3228 | cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
| 3229 | as follows: |
| 3230 | |
| 3231 | t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) |
| 3232 | nil don't display a cursor |
| 3233 | `bar' display a bar cursor with default width |
| 3234 | (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH |
| 3235 | others display a box cursor. |
| 3236 | |
| 3237 | ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
| 3238 | an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a |
| 3239 | defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not |
| 3240 | set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. |
| 3241 | |
| 3242 | ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
| 3243 | specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
| 3244 | the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
| 3245 | text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. |
| 3246 | |
| 3247 | Example: |
| 3248 | |
| 3249 | (string-to-syntax "()") |
| 3250 | => (4 . 41) |
| 3251 | |
| 3252 | ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
| 3253 | other than 10. |
| 3254 | |
| 3255 | *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). |
| 3256 | INTEGER optionally contains a sign. |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 | #b1111 |
| 3259 | => 15 |
| 3260 | #b-1111 |
| 3261 | => -15 |
| 3262 | |
| 3263 | *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). |
| 3264 | |
| 3265 | #o666 |
| 3266 | => 438 |
| 3267 | |
| 3268 | *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). |
| 3269 | |
| 3270 | #xbeef |
| 3271 | => 48815 |
| 3272 | |
| 3273 | *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. |
| 3274 | |
| 3275 | #2R-111 |
| 3276 | => -7 |
| 3277 | #25rah |
| 3278 | => 267 |
| 3279 | |
| 3280 | ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
| 3281 | the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
| 3282 | and isn't a string. |
| 3283 | |
| 3284 | ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
| 3285 | a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil |
| 3286 | value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is |
| 3287 | not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. |
| 3288 | |
| 3289 | ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 | ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
| 3292 | for a regexp in a string. |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 | ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
| 3295 | `mouse-position-function'. |
| 3296 | |
| 3297 | ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
| 3298 | that don't fit into a Lisp integer. |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 | ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
| 3301 | Keywords are now always considered constants. |
| 3302 | |
| 3303 | ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and |
| 3304 | returns it. |
| 3305 | |
| 3306 | ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
| 3307 | returned by function `recent-keys'. |
| 3308 | |
| 3309 | ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
| 3310 | can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
| 3311 | Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a |
| 3312 | etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
| 3313 | mode. |
| 3314 | |
| 3315 | ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
| 3316 | and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
| 3317 | |
| 3318 | ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
| 3319 | has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
| 3320 | function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
| 3321 | returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
| 3322 | been performed." |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 | When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
| 3325 | and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
| 3326 | hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
| 3327 | then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 | ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
| 3330 | In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, |
| 3331 | and the function's value is nil if it is not found. |
| 3332 | |
| 3333 | ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
| 3334 | with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a |
| 3335 | specified table. |
| 3336 | |
| 3337 | (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 | Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of |
| 3340 | TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
| 3341 | saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
| 3342 | what BODY returns. |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 | ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
| 3345 | Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
| 3346 | Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
| 3347 | corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
| 3348 | Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
| 3351 | removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
| 3352 | |
| 3353 | ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
| 3354 | instead of being optional. |
| 3355 | |
| 3356 | ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
| 3357 | modify read-only text. |
| 3358 | |
| 3359 | ** New functions and variables for locales. |
| 3360 | |
| 3361 | The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
| 3362 | decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
| 3363 | time functions like strftime. The new variables |
| 3364 | `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
| 3365 | locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
| 3366 | |
| 3367 | The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
| 3368 | environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
| 3369 | the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
| 3370 | environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
| 3371 | not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
| 3372 | `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
| 3373 | `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
| 3374 | |
| 3375 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
| 3376 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
| 3377 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
| 3378 | start sequences. |
| 3379 | |
| 3380 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
| 3381 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
| 3382 | |
| 3383 | ** New function `propertize' |
| 3384 | |
| 3385 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct |
| 3386 | strings with text properties. |
| 3387 | |
| 3388 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES |
| 3389 | |
| 3390 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified |
| 3391 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with |
| 3392 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the |
| 3393 | specified value of that property. Example: |
| 3394 | |
| 3395 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) |
| 3396 | |
| 3397 | ** push and pop macros. |
| 3398 | |
| 3399 | Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
| 3400 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
| 3401 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
| 3402 | |
| 3403 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. |
| 3404 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it |
| 3405 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 | ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
| 3408 | |
| 3409 | Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
| 3410 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 | (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
| 3413 | Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
| 3414 | using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
| 3415 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
| 3416 | |
| 3417 | (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
| 3418 | Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
| 3419 | inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
| 3420 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
| 3421 | |
| 3422 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
| 3423 | [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character |
| 3424 | class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period |
| 3425 | or a sign. |
| 3426 | |
| 3427 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 |
| 3428 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters |
| 3429 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
| 3430 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only |
| 3431 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
| 3432 | space, and DEL. |
| 3433 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
| 3434 | and DEL. |
| 3435 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. |
| 3436 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 3437 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 3438 | [:alpha:] matches letters. |
| 3439 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 3440 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 3441 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
| 3442 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
| 3443 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. |
| 3444 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. |
| 3445 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 3446 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
| 3447 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
| 3448 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. |
| 3449 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. |
| 3450 | |
| 3451 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
| 3452 | |
| 3453 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: |
| 3454 | |
| 3455 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS |
| 3456 | |
| 3457 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments |
| 3458 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: |
| 3459 | |
| 3460 | :test TEST |
| 3461 | |
| 3462 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. |
| 3463 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, |
| 3464 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. |
| 3465 | |
| 3466 | :size SIZE |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how |
| 3469 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes |
| 3474 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old |
| 3475 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > |
| 3476 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the |
| 3477 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. |
| 3478 | |
| 3479 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD |
| 3480 | |
| 3481 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the |
| 3482 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / |
| 3483 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 | :weakness WEAK |
| 3486 | |
| 3487 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
| 3488 | `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as |
| 3489 | `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage |
| 3490 | collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere |
| 3491 | outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. |
| 3492 | |
| 3493 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. |
| 3496 | |
| 3497 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE |
| 3498 | |
| 3499 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. |
| 3500 | |
| 3501 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE |
| 3502 | |
| 3503 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and |
| 3504 | values are shared. |
| 3505 | |
| 3506 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE |
| 3507 | |
| 3508 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. |
| 3509 | |
| 3510 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
| 3511 | |
| 3512 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. |
| 3513 | |
| 3514 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE |
| 3515 | |
| 3516 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. |
| 3517 | |
| 3518 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
| 3519 | |
| 3520 | Returns the size of TABLE. |
| 3521 | |
| 3522 | - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
| 3523 | |
| 3524 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. |
| 3525 | |
| 3526 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE |
| 3527 | |
| 3528 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. |
| 3529 | |
| 3530 | - Function: clrhash TABLE |
| 3531 | |
| 3532 | Clear TABLE. |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT |
| 3535 | |
| 3536 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if |
| 3537 | not found. |
| 3538 | |
| 3539 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with |
| 3542 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. |
| 3543 | |
| 3544 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE |
| 3545 | |
| 3546 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two |
| 3551 | arguments KEY and VALUE. |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 | - Function: sxhash OBJ |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. |
| 3556 | |
| 3557 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as |
| 3560 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for |
| 3561 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
| 3562 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
| 3563 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). |
| 3564 | |
| 3565 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash |
| 3568 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of |
| 3569 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. |
| 3570 | |
| 3571 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to |
| 3572 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) |
| 3575 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) |
| 3576 | |
| 3577 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) |
| 3578 | (sxhash (upcase a))) |
| 3579 | |
| 3580 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
| 3581 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
| 3582 | |
| 3583 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) |
| 3584 | |
| 3585 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
| 3586 | |
| 3587 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent |
| 3588 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents |
| 3589 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. |
| 3590 | |
| 3591 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
| 3592 | |
| 3593 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs |
| 3594 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. |
| 3595 | |
| 3596 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
| 3597 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the |
| 3598 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it |
| 3599 | is too short to reach that column. |
| 3600 | |
| 3601 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
| 3602 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION |
| 3603 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with |
| 3604 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. |
| 3605 | |
| 3606 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, |
| 3607 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily |
| 3608 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. |
| 3609 | |
| 3610 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
| 3611 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
| 3614 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
| 3617 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be |
| 3618 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If |
| 3619 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use |
| 3620 | temporary-file-directory instead. |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
| 3623 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects |
| 3624 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as |
| 3625 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. |
| 3626 | |
| 3627 | ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
| 3628 | elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. |
| 3629 | |
| 3630 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
| 3631 | |
| 3632 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually |
| 3633 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, |
| 3634 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. |
| 3635 | |
| 3636 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
| 3637 | |
| 3638 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists |
| 3639 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW |
| 3640 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; |
| 3641 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means |
| 3642 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and |
| 3643 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', |
| 3646 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call |
| 3647 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. |
| 3648 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. |
| 3649 | |
| 3650 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
| 3651 | |
| 3652 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. |
| 3653 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties |
| 3654 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the |
| 3655 | result string. |
| 3656 | |
| 3657 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result |
| 3658 | string where arguments appear in the result string. |
| 3659 | |
| 3660 | Example: |
| 3661 | |
| 3662 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") |
| 3663 | (s2 "world")) |
| 3664 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) |
| 3665 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) |
| 3666 | (format s1 s2)) |
| 3667 | |
| 3668 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
| 3671 | |
| 3672 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. |
| 3673 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic |
| 3674 | argument in it. |
| 3675 | |
| 3676 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") |
| 3677 | (arg "world")) |
| 3678 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) |
| 3679 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) |
| 3680 | (message msg arg)) |
| 3681 | |
| 3682 | ** Sound support |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs |
| 3685 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio |
| 3688 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' |
| 3689 | to enable sound support. |
| 3690 | |
| 3691 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a |
| 3692 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined |
| 3693 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The |
| 3694 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the |
| 3695 | sound to play, before playing the sound. |
| 3696 | |
| 3697 | The following sound properties are supported: |
| 3698 | |
| 3699 | - `:file FILE' |
| 3700 | |
| 3701 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be |
| 3702 | searched relative to `data-directory'. |
| 3703 | |
| 3704 | - `:data DATA' |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 | DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data |
| 3707 | may be present, but not both. |
| 3708 | |
| 3709 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
| 3710 | |
| 3711 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range |
| 3712 | 0..1. This property is optional. |
| 3713 | |
| 3714 | - `:device DEVICE' |
| 3715 | |
| 3716 | DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the |
| 3717 | sound. The default device is system-dependent. |
| 3718 | |
| 3719 | Other properties are ignored. |
| 3720 | |
| 3721 | An alternative interface is called as |
| 3722 | (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). |
| 3723 | |
| 3724 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
| 3725 | |
| 3726 | ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
| 3727 | a keyword symbol. |
| 3728 | |
| 3729 | ** Changes to garbage collection |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 | *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
| 3732 | of live and free strings. |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 | *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
| 3735 | strings that have been consed so far. |
| 3736 | |
| 3737 | \f |
| 3738 | * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
| 3739 | Lisp Manual |
| 3740 | |
| 3741 | ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
| 3742 | mini-windows. |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 | ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
| 3745 | argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is |
| 3746 | returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. |
| 3747 | |
| 3748 | ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
| 3749 | |
| 3750 | ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. |
| 3751 | |
| 3752 | ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
| 3753 | image. |
| 3754 | |
| 3755 | - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME |
| 3756 | |
| 3757 | Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). |
| 3758 | |
| 3759 | SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes |
| 3760 | measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical |
| 3761 | character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default |
| 3762 | font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. |
| 3763 | FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. |
| 3764 | |
| 3765 | ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
| 3766 | has a mask bitmap. |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 | - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME |
| 3769 | |
| 3770 | Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. |
| 3771 | FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil |
| 3772 | or omitted means use the selected frame. |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 | ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
| 3775 | satisfying one of a list of specifications. |
| 3776 | |
| 3777 | ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now |
| 3778 | optional. |
| 3779 | |
| 3780 | ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see |
| 3781 | below). |
| 3782 | |
| 3783 | \f |
| 3784 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
| 3785 | |
| 3786 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. |
| 3787 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. |
| 3788 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
| 3789 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. |
| 3790 | |
| 3791 | ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
| 3792 | to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 | Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying |
| 3795 | text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground |
| 3796 | is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on |
| 3797 | your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on |
| 3798 | laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to |
| 3799 | just display it black instead. |
| 3800 | |
| 3801 | This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put |
| 3802 | a line like |
| 3803 | |
| 3804 | (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) |
| 3805 | |
| 3806 | in your `.emacs'. |
| 3807 | |
| 3808 | ** New face implementation. |
| 3809 | |
| 3810 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD |
| 3811 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 | *** New faces. |
| 3814 | |
| 3815 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. |
| 3818 | |
| 3819 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
| 3820 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. |
| 3821 | |
| 3822 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
| 3825 | |
| 3826 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 | 6. Foreground color. |
| 3829 | |
| 3830 | 7. Background color. |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. |
| 3833 | |
| 3834 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. |
| 3835 | |
| 3836 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. |
| 3837 | |
| 3838 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. |
| 3839 | |
| 3840 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what |
| 3841 | color. |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its |
| 3844 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. |
| 3845 | |
| 3846 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the |
| 3847 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different |
| 3848 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named |
| 3849 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector |
| 3850 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
| 3851 | attributes mentioned above. |
| 3852 | |
| 3853 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face |
| 3854 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly |
| 3855 | created frames. |
| 3856 | |
| 3857 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
| 3858 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called |
| 3859 | `fully-specified'. |
| 3860 | |
| 3861 | *** Face merging. |
| 3862 | |
| 3863 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by |
| 3864 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any |
| 3865 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text |
| 3866 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure |
| 3867 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always |
| 3868 | results in a fully-specified face. |
| 3869 | |
| 3870 | *** Face realization. |
| 3871 | |
| 3872 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by |
| 3873 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The |
| 3874 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically |
| 3875 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized |
| 3876 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face |
| 3877 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. |
| 3878 | |
| 3879 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the |
| 3880 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used |
| 3881 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different |
| 3882 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. |
| 3883 | |
| 3884 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a |
| 3885 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face |
| 3886 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of |
| 3887 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with |
| 3888 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. |
| 3889 | |
| 3890 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function |
| 3891 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > |
| 3892 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from |
| 3893 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is |
| 3894 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for |
| 3895 | Emacs. |
| 3896 | |
| 3897 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with |
| 3898 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same |
| 3899 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent |
| 3900 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. |
| 3901 | |
| 3902 | **** Clearing face caches. |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches |
| 3905 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload |
| 3906 | unused fonts. |
| 3907 | |
| 3908 | *** Font selection. |
| 3909 | |
| 3910 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
| 3911 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently |
| 3912 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a |
| 3915 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font |
| 3916 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a |
| 3917 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to |
| 3918 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched |
| 3921 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best |
| 3922 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. |
| 3923 | |
| 3924 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. |
| 3925 | |
| 3926 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face |
| 3927 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting |
| 3928 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute |
| 3929 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means |
| 3930 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font |
| 3931 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries |
| 3932 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. |
| 3933 | |
| 3934 | Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
| 3935 | alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face |
| 3936 | doesn't exist. |
| 3937 | |
| 3938 | Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
| 3939 | all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
| 3940 | registry. |
| 3941 | |
| 3942 | Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
| 3943 | slightly different. |
| 3944 | |
| 3945 | Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. |
| 3946 | |
| 3947 | |
| 3948 | **** Scalable fonts |
| 3949 | |
| 3950 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, |
| 3951 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 |
| 3952 | servers. |
| 3953 | |
| 3954 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable |
| 3955 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
| 3956 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
| 3957 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A |
| 3958 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from |
| 3959 | that list. Example: |
| 3960 | |
| 3961 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) |
| 3962 | |
| 3963 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. |
| 3964 | |
| 3965 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
| 3966 | |
| 3967 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME |
| 3968 | |
| 3969 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY |
| 3970 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a |
| 3971 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. |
| 3972 | |
| 3973 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of |
| 3974 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P |
| 3975 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. |
| 3976 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and |
| 3977 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. |
| 3978 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil |
| 3979 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and |
| 3980 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of |
| 3981 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting |
| 3982 | of the face font sort order. |
| 3983 | |
| 3984 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
| 3985 | |
| 3986 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is |
| 3987 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses |
| 3988 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is |
| 3989 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. |
| 3990 | |
| 3991 | - Variable: font-list-limit |
| 3992 | |
| 3993 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions |
| 3994 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a |
| 3995 | matching font. The default is currently 100. |
| 3996 | |
| 3997 | *** Setting face attributes. |
| 3998 | |
| 3999 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible |
| 4000 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now |
| 4001 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and |
| 4002 | `face-attribute'. |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword |
| 4005 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. |
| 4006 | |
| 4007 | The following attributes are recognized: |
| 4008 | |
| 4009 | `:family' |
| 4010 | |
| 4011 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', |
| 4012 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' |
| 4013 | and `?' are allowed. |
| 4014 | |
| 4015 | `:width' |
| 4016 | |
| 4017 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. |
| 4018 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', |
| 4019 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', |
| 4020 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. |
| 4021 | |
| 4022 | `:height' |
| 4023 | |
| 4024 | VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
| 4025 | in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to |
| 4026 | scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old |
| 4027 | height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 | `:weight' |
| 4030 | |
| 4031 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the |
| 4032 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', |
| 4033 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. |
| 4034 | |
| 4035 | `:slant' |
| 4036 | |
| 4037 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the |
| 4038 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or |
| 4039 | `reverse-oblique'. |
| 4040 | |
| 4041 | `:foreground', `:background' |
| 4042 | |
| 4043 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. |
| 4044 | |
| 4045 | `:underline' |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If |
| 4048 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is |
| 4049 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly |
| 4050 | don't underline. |
| 4051 | |
| 4052 | `:overline' |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If |
| 4055 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a |
| 4056 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't |
| 4057 | overline. |
| 4058 | |
| 4059 | `:strike-through' |
| 4060 | |
| 4061 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line |
| 4062 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the |
| 4063 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE |
| 4064 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. |
| 4065 | |
| 4066 | `:box' |
| 4067 | |
| 4068 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn |
| 4069 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If |
| 4070 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color |
| 4071 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, |
| 4072 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, |
| 4073 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH |
| 4074 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from |
| 4075 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as |
| 4076 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it |
| 4077 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is |
| 4078 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background |
| 4079 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box |
| 4080 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking |
| 4081 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box |
| 4082 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if |
| 4083 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D |
| 4084 | box. |
| 4085 | |
| 4086 | `:inverse-video' |
| 4087 | |
| 4088 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in |
| 4089 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 | `:stipple' |
| 4092 | |
| 4093 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. |
| 4094 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are |
| 4095 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH |
| 4096 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA |
| 4097 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means |
| 4098 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. |
| 4099 | |
| 4100 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', |
| 4101 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: |
| 4102 | |
| 4103 | `:font' |
| 4104 | |
| 4105 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid |
| 4106 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font |
| 4107 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous |
| 4108 | versions of Emacs. |
| 4109 | |
| 4110 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can |
| 4111 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE |
| 4112 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." |
| 4113 | |
| 4114 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and |
| 4115 | `defface'. |
| 4116 | |
| 4117 | `:inherit' |
| 4118 | |
| 4119 | VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list |
| 4120 | of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face |
| 4121 | like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. |
| 4122 | |
| 4123 | *** Face attributes and X resources |
| 4124 | |
| 4125 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes |
| 4126 | from X resources: |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 | Face attribute X resource class |
| 4129 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4130 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily |
| 4131 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth |
| 4132 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight |
| 4133 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight |
| 4134 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant |
| 4135 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground |
| 4136 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground |
| 4137 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline |
| 4138 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough |
| 4139 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox |
| 4140 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline |
| 4141 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse |
| 4142 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple |
| 4143 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 4144 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 4145 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
| 4146 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold |
| 4147 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic |
| 4148 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
| 4149 | |
| 4150 | *** Text property `face'. |
| 4151 | |
| 4152 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face |
| 4153 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face |
| 4154 | specification can be |
| 4155 | |
| 4156 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. |
| 4157 | |
| 4158 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each |
| 4159 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value |
| 4160 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' |
| 4161 | for face attribute names. |
| 4162 | |
| 4163 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or |
| 4164 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is |
| 4165 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. |
| 4166 | |
| 4167 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
| 4168 | |
| 4169 | The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
| 4170 | on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
| 4171 | the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
| 4172 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
| 4173 | `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
| 4174 | used to clear the mapping table. |
| 4175 | |
| 4176 | ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 | The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
| 4179 | and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
| 4180 | type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
| 4181 | color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
| 4182 | display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
| 4183 | old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
| 4184 | `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
| 4185 | compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
| 4186 | should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
| 4187 | modify their color-related behavior. |
| 4188 | |
| 4189 | The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
| 4190 | any frame type. |
| 4191 | |
| 4192 | ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
| 4193 | |
| 4194 | The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
| 4195 | `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
| 4196 | `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
| 4197 | `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
| 4198 | `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
| 4199 | `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
| 4200 | display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
| 4201 | the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
| 4202 | platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
| 4203 | |
| 4204 | The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular |
| 4205 | display can display image files. |
| 4206 | |
| 4207 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
| 4208 | |
| 4209 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
| 4210 | To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
| 4211 | the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the |
| 4212 | `Inviolable' option. |
| 4213 | |
| 4214 | The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
| 4215 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
| 4216 | Otherwise, it returns zero. |
| 4217 | |
| 4218 | ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 | There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
| 4221 | buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
| 4222 | property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
| 4223 | |
| 4224 | Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
| 4225 | forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
| 4226 | to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
| 4227 | not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
| 4228 | commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
| 4229 | boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding |
| 4230 | `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these |
| 4231 | functions. |
| 4232 | |
| 4233 | Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
| 4234 | a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
| 4235 | editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
| 4236 | |
| 4237 | The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 | - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 | Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4244 | If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
| 4245 | constrained position if that is different. |
| 4246 | |
| 4247 | If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
| 4248 | positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
| 4249 | ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
| 4250 | constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
| 4251 | as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
| 4252 | is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
| 4253 | fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
| 4254 | the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is |
| 4255 | also considered to be `on the boundary'. |
| 4256 | |
| 4257 | If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
| 4258 | NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
| 4259 | unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
| 4260 | C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
| 4261 | only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
| 4262 | |
| 4263 | If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
| 4264 | a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. |
| 4265 | |
| 4266 | Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. |
| 4267 | |
| 4268 | - Function: delete-field &optional POS |
| 4269 | |
| 4270 | Delete the field surrounding POS. |
| 4271 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4272 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
| 4273 | |
| 4274 | - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
| 4275 | |
| 4276 | Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
| 4277 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4278 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
| 4279 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its |
| 4280 | field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
| 4281 | |
| 4282 | - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
| 4283 | |
| 4284 | Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
| 4285 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4286 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
| 4287 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, |
| 4288 | then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 | - Function: field-string &optional POS |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 | Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
| 4293 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4294 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
| 4295 | |
| 4296 | - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
| 4297 | |
| 4298 | Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
| 4299 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
| 4300 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 | ** Image support. |
| 4303 | |
| 4304 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving |
| 4305 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of |
| 4306 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value |
| 4307 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. |
| 4308 | |
| 4309 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of |
| 4310 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If |
| 4311 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a |
| 4312 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal |
| 4313 | area. |
| 4314 | |
| 4315 | IMAGE is an image specification. |
| 4316 | |
| 4317 | *** Image specifications |
| 4318 | |
| 4319 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS |
| 4320 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each |
| 4321 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a |
| 4322 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
| 4323 | described below are ignored. |
| 4324 | |
| 4325 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. |
| 4326 | |
| 4327 | `:ascent ASCENT' |
| 4328 | |
| 4329 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
| 4330 | If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height |
| 4331 | to use for its ascent. |
| 4332 | |
| 4333 | If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the |
| 4334 | image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. |
| 4335 | |
| 4336 | If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
| 4337 | centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
| 4338 | of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and |
| 4339 | overlays that apply to the image. |
| 4340 | |
| 4341 | `:margin MARGIN' |
| 4342 | |
| 4343 | MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
| 4344 | as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the |
| 4345 | horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. |
| 4346 | |
| 4347 | `:relief RELIEF' |
| 4348 | |
| 4349 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief |
| 4350 | around an image. |
| 4351 | |
| 4352 | `:conversion ALGO' |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
| 4355 | |
| 4356 | ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' |
| 4357 | edge-detection algorithm to the image. |
| 4358 | |
| 4359 | ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means |
| 4360 | apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a |
| 4361 | nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at |
| 4362 | position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels |
| 4363 | around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the |
| 4364 | neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the |
| 4365 | transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at |
| 4366 | x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown |
| 4367 | below. |
| 4368 | |
| 4369 | (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 |
| 4370 | x-1/y x/y x+1/y |
| 4371 | x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) |
| 4372 | |
| 4373 | The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color |
| 4374 | resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, |
| 4375 | multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum |
| 4376 | of the factors' absolute values. |
| 4377 | |
| 4378 | Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
| 4379 | |
| 4380 | (1 0 0 |
| 4381 | 0 0 0 |
| 4382 | 9 9 -1) |
| 4383 | |
| 4384 | Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of |
| 4385 | |
| 4386 | ( 2 -1 0 |
| 4387 | -1 0 1 |
| 4388 | 0 1 -2) |
| 4389 | |
| 4390 | ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
| 4391 | ``disabled''. |
| 4392 | |
| 4393 | `:mask MASK' |
| 4394 | |
| 4395 | If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for |
| 4396 | the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the |
| 4397 | image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the |
| 4398 | background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the |
| 4399 | image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
| 4400 | the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
| 4401 | GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the |
| 4402 | image. |
| 4403 | |
| 4404 | If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
| 4405 | in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying |
| 4406 | `:mask nil'. |
| 4407 | |
| 4408 | `:file FILE' |
| 4409 | |
| 4410 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, |
| 4411 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support |
| 4412 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property |
| 4413 | may be present in the image specification. |
| 4414 | |
| 4415 | `:data DATA' |
| 4416 | |
| 4417 | Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
| 4418 | supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
| 4419 | present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
| 4420 | support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
| 4421 | |
| 4422 | *** Supported image types |
| 4423 | |
| 4424 | **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
| 4425 | |
| 4426 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image |
| 4427 | properties supported are |
| 4428 | |
| 4429 | `:foreground FG' |
| 4430 | |
| 4431 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
| 4432 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. |
| 4433 | |
| 4434 | `:background BG' |
| 4435 | |
| 4436 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
| 4437 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
| 4438 | |
| 4439 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this |
| 4440 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties |
| 4441 | instead of a `:file' property. |
| 4442 | |
| 4443 | `:width WIDTH' |
| 4444 | |
| 4445 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. |
| 4446 | |
| 4447 | `:height HEIGHT' |
| 4448 | |
| 4449 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. |
| 4450 | |
| 4451 | `:data DATA' |
| 4452 | |
| 4453 | DATA must be either |
| 4454 | |
| 4455 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must |
| 4456 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT |
| 4457 | |
| 4458 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT |
| 4459 | |
| 4460 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the |
| 4461 | bitmap. |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 | 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
| 4464 | height may be specified in this case because these are defined |
| 4465 | in the file. |
| 4466 | |
| 4467 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package |
| 4470 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is |
| 4471 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via |
| 4472 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. |
| 4473 | |
| 4474 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 4475 | |
| 4476 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' |
| 4477 | |
| 4478 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the |
| 4479 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color |
| 4480 | name. |
| 4481 | |
| 4482 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, |
| 4483 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. |
| 4484 | |
| 4485 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
| 4486 | to display compressed images. |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' |
| 4489 | |
| 4490 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and |
| 4491 | mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
| 4492 | mono images are |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 | `:foreground FG' |
| 4495 | |
| 4496 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
| 4497 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground. |
| 4498 | |
| 4499 | `:background FG' |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
| 4502 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
| 4503 | |
| 4504 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' |
| 4505 | |
| 4506 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', |
| 4507 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
| 4508 | are: |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
| 4511 | |
| 4512 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', |
| 4513 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
| 4514 | properties defined. |
| 4515 | |
| 4516 | **** GIF, image type `gif' |
| 4517 | |
| 4518 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package |
| 4519 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. |
| 4520 | |
| 4521 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 4522 | |
| 4523 | `:index INDEX' |
| 4524 | |
| 4525 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a |
| 4526 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
| 4527 | |
| 4528 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. |
| 4529 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file |
| 4530 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images |
| 4531 | every 0.1 seconds. |
| 4532 | |
| 4533 | (defun show-anim (file max) |
| 4534 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." |
| 4535 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) |
| 4536 | |
| 4537 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) |
| 4538 | (when (= idx max) |
| 4539 | (setq idx 0)) |
| 4540 | (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
| 4541 | (save-excursion |
| 4542 | (set-buffer buffer) |
| 4543 | (goto-char (point-min)) |
| 4544 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) |
| 4545 | (insert-image img "x")) |
| 4546 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) |
| 4547 | |
| 4548 | **** PNG, image type `png' |
| 4549 | |
| 4550 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', |
| 4551 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
| 4552 | properties defined. |
| 4553 | |
| 4554 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. |
| 4555 | |
| 4556 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 4557 | |
| 4558 | `:pt-width WIDTH' |
| 4559 | |
| 4560 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an |
| 4561 | integer. This is a required property. |
| 4562 | |
| 4563 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' |
| 4564 | |
| 4565 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT |
| 4566 | must be a integer. This is an required property. |
| 4567 | |
| 4568 | `:bounding-box BOX' |
| 4569 | |
| 4570 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of |
| 4571 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS |
| 4572 | files. This is an required property. |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See |
| 4575 | lisp/gs.el. |
| 4576 | |
| 4577 | *** Lisp interface. |
| 4578 | |
| 4579 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
| 4580 | which are supported in the current configuration. |
| 4581 | |
| 4582 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when |
| 4583 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. |
| 4584 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache |
| 4585 | manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
| 4586 | images with `equal' specifications share the same image. |
| 4587 | |
| 4588 | *** Simplified image API, image.el |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image |
| 4591 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' |
| 4592 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to |
| 4593 | define an image based on available image types. The functions |
| 4594 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a |
| 4595 | buffer. |
| 4596 | |
| 4597 | ** Display margins. |
| 4598 | |
| 4599 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text |
| 4600 | and images. |
| 4601 | |
| 4602 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables |
| 4603 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call |
| 4604 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to |
| 4605 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and |
| 4606 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying |
| 4607 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update |
| 4608 | of the display margins. |
| 4609 | |
| 4610 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property |
| 4611 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is |
| 4612 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a |
| 4613 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later |
| 4614 | in this file). |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 | ** Help display |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse |
| 4619 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property |
| 4620 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line |
| 4621 | that have a `help-echo' property. |
| 4622 | |
| 4623 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
| 4624 | is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
| 4625 | the window in which the help was found. |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 | If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the |
| 4628 | `help-echo' text property was found. |
| 4629 | |
| 4630 | If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and |
| 4631 | POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. |
| 4632 | |
| 4633 | If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with |
| 4634 | the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
| 4635 | mouse. |
| 4636 | |
| 4637 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
| 4638 | string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. |
| 4639 | |
| 4640 | For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to |
| 4641 | determine the help to display. If their definition contains a |
| 4642 | property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. |
| 4643 | For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is |
| 4644 | used as help string. |
| 4645 | |
| 4646 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays |
| 4647 | the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
| 4648 | causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
| 4649 | |
| 4650 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
| 4651 | |
| 4652 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. |
| 4653 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. |
| 4654 | |
| 4655 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical |
| 4656 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. |
| 4657 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical |
| 4658 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be |
| 4659 | used. |
| 4660 | |
| 4661 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
| 4662 | #'(lambda () |
| 4663 | (interactive) |
| 4664 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 4665 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
| 4666 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
| 4667 | #'(lambda () |
| 4668 | (interactive) |
| 4669 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 4670 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
| 4671 | |
| 4672 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
| 4673 | |
| 4674 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay |
| 4675 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This |
| 4676 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function |
| 4677 | is called with one argument, POS. |
| 4678 | |
| 4679 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more |
| 4680 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them |
| 4681 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text |
| 4682 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the |
| 4683 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 | ** Tool bar support. |
| 4686 | |
| 4687 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame |
| 4688 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") |
| 4689 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value |
| 4690 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and |
| 4691 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed |
| 4692 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. |
| 4693 | |
| 4694 | *** Tool bar item definitions |
| 4695 | |
| 4696 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
| 4697 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' |
| 4698 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. |
| 4699 | |
| 4700 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
| 4701 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in |
| 4702 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' |
| 4703 | property (see below). |
| 4704 | |
| 4705 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
| 4706 | binding are currently ignored. |
| 4707 | |
| 4708 | The following properties are recognized: |
| 4709 | |
| 4710 | `:enable FORM'. |
| 4711 | |
| 4712 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
| 4713 | or disabled. |
| 4714 | |
| 4715 | `:visible FORM' |
| 4716 | |
| 4717 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
| 4718 | |
| 4719 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
| 4720 | |
| 4721 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which |
| 4722 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is |
| 4723 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. |
| 4724 | |
| 4725 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
| 4726 | |
| 4727 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated |
| 4728 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. |
| 4729 | |
| 4730 | `:image IMAGES' |
| 4731 | |
| 4732 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four |
| 4733 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the |
| 4734 | meaning of each of the four elements: |
| 4735 | |
| 4736 | Index Use when item is |
| 4737 | ---------------------------------------- |
| 4738 | 0 enabled and selected |
| 4739 | 1 enabled and deselected |
| 4740 | 2 disabled and selected |
| 4741 | 3 disabled and deselected |
| 4742 | |
| 4743 | If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
| 4744 | algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. |
| 4745 | |
| 4746 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
| 4747 | |
| 4748 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
| 4749 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. |
| 4750 | |
| 4751 | The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
| 4752 | toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
| 4753 | to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the |
| 4754 | menu bar. |
| 4755 | |
| 4756 | The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
| 4757 | dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set |
| 4758 | buffer-locally to override the global map. |
| 4759 | |
| 4760 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
| 4761 | |
| 4762 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically |
| 4763 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger |
| 4764 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. |
| 4765 | |
| 4766 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
| 4767 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
| 4768 | |
| 4769 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting |
| 4770 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of |
| 4771 | pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
| 4772 | vertical margins . Default is 1. |
| 4773 | |
| 4774 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting |
| 4775 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. |
| 4776 | |
| 4777 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. |
| 4778 | |
| 4779 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on |
| 4780 | a tool bar item. If |
| 4781 | |
| 4782 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] |
| 4783 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell |
| 4784 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) |
| 4785 | |
| 4786 | is the original tool bar item definition, then |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) |
| 4789 | |
| 4790 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same |
| 4791 | item. |
| 4792 | |
| 4793 | ** Mode line changes. |
| 4794 | |
| 4795 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
| 4796 | |
| 4797 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there |
| 4798 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display |
| 4799 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. |
| 4800 | |
| 4801 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has |
| 4802 | a `local-map' text property. |
| 4803 | |
| 4804 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and |
| 4805 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. |
| 4806 | |
| 4807 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM |
| 4808 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a |
| 4809 | `local-map' property. |
| 4810 | |
| 4811 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' |
| 4812 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an |
| 4813 | example. |
| 4814 | |
| 4815 | *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
| 4816 | evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
| 4817 | |
| 4818 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
| 4819 | variable mode-line-format to nil. |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
| 4822 | |
| 4823 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable |
| 4824 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are |
| 4825 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and |
| 4826 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top |
| 4827 | line. |
| 4828 | |
| 4829 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face |
| 4830 | `header-line'. |
| 4831 | |
| 4832 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a |
| 4833 | position in the header-line. |
| 4834 | |
| 4835 | ** Text property `display' |
| 4836 | |
| 4837 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
| 4838 | replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is |
| 4839 | also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of |
| 4840 | the `display' property should be a display specification, as described |
| 4841 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
| 4842 | |
| 4843 | *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
| 4844 | |
| 4845 | To replace the text having the `display' property with some other |
| 4846 | text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. |
| 4847 | |
| 4848 | If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left |
| 4849 | marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in |
| 4850 | the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING |
| 4851 | is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
| 4852 | simpler form STRING as property value. |
| 4853 | |
| 4854 | *** Variable width and height spaces |
| 4855 | |
| 4856 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display |
| 4857 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is |
| 4858 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal |
| 4859 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right |
| 4860 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is |
| 4861 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
| 4862 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. |
| 4863 | |
| 4864 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space |
| 4865 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the |
| 4866 | properties described below. |
| 4867 | |
| 4868 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the |
| 4869 | characters having the `display' property. |
| 4870 | |
| 4871 | - :width WIDTH |
| 4872 | |
| 4873 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal |
| 4874 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. |
| 4875 | |
| 4876 | - :relative-width FACTOR |
| 4877 | |
| 4878 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the |
| 4879 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the |
| 4880 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the |
| 4881 | width of that character by FACTOR. |
| 4882 | |
| 4883 | - :align-to HPOS |
| 4884 | |
| 4885 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The |
| 4886 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. |
| 4887 | |
| 4888 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. |
| 4889 | |
| 4890 | - :height HEIGHT |
| 4891 | |
| 4892 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the |
| 4893 | normal line height. |
| 4894 | |
| 4895 | - :relative-height FACTOR |
| 4896 | |
| 4897 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height |
| 4898 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. |
| 4899 | |
| 4900 | - :ascent ASCENT |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be |
| 4903 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the |
| 4904 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or |
| 4905 | equal to 100. |
| 4906 | |
| 4907 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 | *** Images |
| 4910 | |
| 4911 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION |
| 4912 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, |
| 4913 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in |
| 4914 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', |
| 4915 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is |
| 4916 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal |
| 4917 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in |
| 4918 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE |
| 4919 | as display specification. |
| 4920 | |
| 4921 | *** Other display properties |
| 4922 | |
| 4923 | - (space-width FACTOR) |
| 4924 | |
| 4925 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property |
| 4926 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an |
| 4927 | integer or float. |
| 4928 | |
| 4929 | - (height HEIGHT) |
| 4930 | |
| 4931 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. |
| 4932 | |
| 4933 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that |
| 4934 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of |
| 4935 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A |
| 4936 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which |
| 4937 | a font is available counts as a step. |
| 4938 | |
| 4939 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times |
| 4940 | as tall as the frame's default font. |
| 4941 | |
| 4942 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current |
| 4943 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol |
| 4946 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 | - (raise FACTOR) |
| 4949 | |
| 4950 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current |
| 4951 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters |
| 4952 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The |
| 4953 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the |
| 4954 | `height' subproperty. |
| 4955 | |
| 4956 | *** Conditional display properties |
| 4957 | |
| 4958 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification |
| 4959 | has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies |
| 4960 | only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the |
| 4961 | evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the |
| 4962 | conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are |
| 4963 | bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where |
| 4964 | the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be |
| 4965 | different when object is a string. |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to |
| 4968 | `(when t . SPEC)'. |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 | ** New menu separator types. |
| 4971 | |
| 4972 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with |
| 4973 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are |
| 4974 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used |
| 4975 | to specify other menu separator types. |
| 4976 | |
| 4977 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' |
| 4978 | |
| 4979 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the |
| 4980 | separator occurs. |
| 4981 | |
| 4982 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' |
| 4983 | |
| 4984 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 4985 | |
| 4986 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' |
| 4987 | |
| 4988 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 4989 | |
| 4990 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' |
| 4991 | |
| 4992 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' |
| 4995 | |
| 4996 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 4997 | |
| 4998 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' |
| 4999 | |
| 5000 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
| 5001 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
| 5002 | |
| 5003 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' |
| 5004 | |
| 5005 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. |
| 5006 | |
| 5007 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' |
| 5008 | |
| 5009 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 5010 | |
| 5011 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' |
| 5012 | |
| 5013 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. |
| 5014 | |
| 5015 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' |
| 5016 | |
| 5017 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' |
| 5020 | |
| 5021 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. |
| 5022 | |
| 5023 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' |
| 5024 | |
| 5025 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 5026 | |
| 5027 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' |
| 5028 | |
| 5029 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. |
| 5030 | |
| 5031 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like |
| 5032 | the corresponding single-line separators. |
| 5033 | |
| 5034 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
| 5035 | |
| 5036 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
| 5037 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. |
| 5038 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify |
| 5039 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, |
| 5040 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the |
| 5041 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the |
| 5042 | default foreground is black. |
| 5043 | |
| 5044 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' |
| 5045 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class |
| 5046 | `ScrollBarBackground'). |
| 5047 | |
| 5048 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource |
| 5049 | settings for scroll bar colors. |
| 5050 | |
| 5051 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
| 5052 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. |
| 5053 | |
| 5054 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
| 5055 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based |
| 5056 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued |
| 5057 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from |
| 5058 | the original window start. |
| 5059 | |
| 5060 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
| 5061 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed |
| 5062 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. |
| 5063 | |
| 5064 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
| 5065 | |
| 5066 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable |
| 5067 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes |
| 5068 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any |
| 5069 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. |
| 5070 | |
| 5071 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer |
| 5072 | fixed-width and fixed-height. |
| 5073 | |
| 5074 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) |
| 5075 | |
| 5076 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is |
| 5077 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the |
| 5078 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To |
| 5079 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' |
| 5080 | temporarily to nil, for example |
| 5081 | |
| 5082 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) |
| 5083 | (enlarge-window 10)) |
| 5084 | |
| 5085 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
| 5086 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
| 5087 | |
| 5088 | ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
| 5089 | terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
| 5090 | to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
| 5091 | overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
| 5092 | horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
| 5093 | support a vertical-bar cursor). |
| 5094 | |
| 5095 | |
| 5096 | \f |
| 5097 | * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
| 5098 | |
| 5099 | ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard |
| 5100 | input. |
| 5101 | |
| 5102 | ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. |
| 5103 | |
| 5104 | ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. |
| 5105 | |
| 5106 | ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not |
| 5107 | only for character input, but also in incremental search. The |
| 5108 | exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets |
| 5109 | (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence |
| 5110 | (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. |
| 5111 | |
| 5112 | ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has |
| 5113 | been added. |
| 5114 | |
| 5115 | \f |
| 5116 | * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
| 5117 | |
| 5118 | ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. |
| 5119 | |
| 5120 | |
| 5121 | \f |
| 5122 | * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
| 5123 | |
| 5124 | ** Not new, but not mentioned before: |
| 5125 | M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. |
| 5126 | \f |
| 5127 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 5128 | |
| 5129 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. |
| 5130 | |
| 5131 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. |
| 5132 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name |
| 5133 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. |
| 5134 | |
| 5135 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file |
| 5136 | is the one that is used. |
| 5137 | |
| 5138 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return |
| 5139 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). |
| 5140 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, |
| 5141 | separate from the command's regular output. |
| 5142 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer |
| 5143 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. |
| 5144 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies |
| 5145 | the buffer name. |
| 5146 | |
| 5147 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error |
| 5148 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate |
| 5149 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not |
| 5150 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. |
| 5151 | |
| 5152 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in |
| 5153 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, |
| 5154 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers |
| 5155 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. |
| 5156 | |
| 5157 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For |
| 5158 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names |
| 5159 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the |
| 5160 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. |
| 5161 | |
| 5162 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches |
| 5163 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: |
| 5164 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then |
| 5165 | they never ignore case. |
| 5166 | |
| 5167 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned |
| 5168 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually |
| 5169 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents |
| 5170 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or |
| 5171 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs |
| 5172 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a |
| 5173 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. |
| 5174 | |
| 5175 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to |
| 5176 | the same format that was used in the file before. |
| 5177 | |
| 5178 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable |
| 5179 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. |
| 5180 | |
| 5181 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been |
| 5182 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. |
| 5183 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. |
| 5184 | |
| 5185 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. |
| 5186 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a |
| 5187 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for |
| 5188 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format |
| 5189 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual |
| 5190 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for |
| 5191 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). |
| 5192 | |
| 5193 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, |
| 5194 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, |
| 5195 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line |
| 5196 | format. You can now customize these variables. |
| 5197 | |
| 5198 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a |
| 5199 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a |
| 5200 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of |
| 5201 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. |
| 5202 | |
| 5203 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode |
| 5204 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given |
| 5205 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. |
| 5206 | |
| 5207 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function |
| 5208 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file |
| 5209 | doesn't have any effect. |
| 5210 | |
| 5211 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, |
| 5212 | not one per buffer. |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to |
| 5215 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: |
| 5216 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) |
| 5217 | |
| 5218 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. |
| 5219 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the |
| 5220 | `auto-show-mode' command. |
| 5221 | |
| 5222 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to |
| 5223 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous |
| 5224 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font |
| 5225 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change |
| 5226 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. |
| 5227 | |
| 5228 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's |
| 5229 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. |
| 5230 | |
| 5231 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the |
| 5232 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this |
| 5233 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. |
| 5234 | |
| 5235 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at |
| 5236 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an |
| 5237 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode |
| 5238 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. |
| 5239 | |
| 5240 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. |
| 5241 | |
| 5242 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system |
| 5243 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and |
| 5244 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that |
| 5245 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character |
| 5246 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. |
| 5247 | |
| 5248 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates |
| 5249 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. |
| 5250 | |
| 5251 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have |
| 5252 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to |
| 5253 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to |
| 5254 | `?' on other systems. |
| 5255 | |
| 5256 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this |
| 5257 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on |
| 5258 | Unix. |
| 5259 | |
| 5260 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the |
| 5261 | current codepage when it starts. |
| 5262 | |
| 5263 | ** Mail changes |
| 5264 | |
| 5265 | *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
| 5266 | `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', |
| 5267 | appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if |
| 5268 | non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other |
| 5269 | MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three |
| 5270 | headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is |
| 5271 | latin-1: |
| 5272 | |
| 5273 | MIME-version: 1.0 |
| 5274 | Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 |
| 5275 | Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit |
| 5276 | |
| 5277 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
| 5278 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than |
| 5279 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than |
| 5280 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of |
| 5281 | buffer-file-coding-system. |
| 5282 | |
| 5283 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set |
| 5284 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing |
| 5285 | mail. |
| 5286 | |
| 5287 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, |
| 5288 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, |
| 5289 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a |
| 5290 | list of possible coding systems. |
| 5291 | |
| 5292 | ** CC Mode changes |
| 5293 | |
| 5294 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major |
| 5295 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no |
| 5296 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's |
| 5297 | docstring for details. |
| 5298 | |
| 5299 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic |
| 5300 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is |
| 5301 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a |
| 5302 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied |
| 5303 | lineup functions use this feature currently. |
| 5304 | |
| 5305 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and |
| 5306 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. |
| 5307 | |
| 5308 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for |
| 5309 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. |
| 5310 | |
| 5311 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately |
| 5312 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new |
| 5313 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on |
| 5314 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for |
| 5315 | anonymous classes. |
| 5316 | |
| 5317 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific |
| 5318 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont |
| 5319 | |
| 5320 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol |
| 5321 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike |
| 5322 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup |
| 5323 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. |
| 5324 | |
| 5325 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists |
| 5326 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open |
| 5327 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. |
| 5328 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces |
| 5329 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). |
| 5330 | |
| 5331 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. |
| 5332 | |
| 5333 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. |
| 5334 | |
| 5335 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) |
| 5336 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. |
| 5337 | |
| 5338 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. |
| 5339 | |
| 5340 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation |
| 5341 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. |
| 5342 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some |
| 5343 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the |
| 5344 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). |
| 5345 | |
| 5346 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 5347 | |
| 5348 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been |
| 5349 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the |
| 5350 | Gnus manual for the full story. |
| 5351 | |
| 5352 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than |
| 5353 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft |
| 5354 | group, which is created automatically. |
| 5355 | |
| 5356 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header |
| 5357 | values. |
| 5358 | |
| 5359 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message |
| 5362 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. |
| 5363 | |
| 5364 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with |
| 5365 | `C-u C-c C-c'. |
| 5366 | |
| 5367 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. |
| 5368 | |
| 5369 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit |
| 5370 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. |
| 5371 | |
| 5372 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. |
| 5373 | |
| 5374 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic |
| 5375 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. |
| 5376 | |
| 5377 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix |
| 5378 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. |
| 5379 | |
| 5380 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater |
| 5381 | control over simplification. |
| 5382 | |
| 5383 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. |
| 5384 | |
| 5385 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the |
| 5386 | limit. |
| 5387 | |
| 5388 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. |
| 5389 | |
| 5390 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. |
| 5391 | |
| 5392 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
| 5393 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
| 5394 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. |
| 5395 | |
| 5396 | *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
| 5397 | `a' forces normal posting method. |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text |
| 5400 | -- `W d'. |
| 5401 | |
| 5402 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' |
| 5403 | to a non-nil value. |
| 5404 | |
| 5405 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling |
| 5406 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. |
| 5407 | |
| 5408 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer |
| 5409 | has been added. |
| 5410 | |
| 5411 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. |
| 5412 | |
| 5413 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. |
| 5414 | |
| 5415 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting |
| 5416 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. |
| 5417 | |
| 5418 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- |
| 5419 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. |
| 5420 | |
| 5421 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. |
| 5422 | |
| 5423 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has |
| 5424 | been added. |
| 5425 | |
| 5426 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the |
| 5427 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. |
| 5428 | |
| 5429 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually |
| 5430 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. |
| 5431 | |
| 5432 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. |
| 5433 | |
| 5434 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. |
| 5435 | |
| 5436 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. |
| 5437 | |
| 5438 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode |
| 5439 | |
| 5440 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give |
| 5441 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in |
| 5442 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". |
| 5443 | |
| 5444 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a |
| 5445 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some |
| 5446 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run |
| 5447 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you |
| 5448 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. |
| 5449 | |
| 5450 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. |
| 5451 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available |
| 5452 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use |
| 5453 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. |
| 5454 | |
| 5455 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check |
| 5456 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* |
| 5457 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular |
| 5458 | mismatch. |
| 5459 | |
| 5460 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 5461 | |
| 5462 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and |
| 5463 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. |
| 5464 | |
| 5465 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now |
| 5466 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 |
| 5467 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be |
| 5468 | removed from the label. |
| 5469 | |
| 5470 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use |
| 5471 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. |
| 5472 | |
| 5473 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the |
| 5474 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. |
| 5475 | |
| 5476 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to |
| 5477 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular |
| 5478 | expressions. |
| 5479 | |
| 5480 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. |
| 5481 | |
| 5482 | ** New/deleted modes and packages |
| 5483 | |
| 5484 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and |
| 5485 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. |
| 5486 | |
| 5487 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for |
| 5488 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with |
| 5489 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. |
| 5490 | |
| 5491 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer |
| 5492 | changes with a special face. |
| 5493 | |
| 5494 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and |
| 5495 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use |
| 5496 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. |
| 5497 | \f |
| 5498 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 5499 | |
| 5500 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. |
| 5501 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, |
| 5502 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, |
| 5503 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, |
| 5504 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. |
| 5505 | |
| 5506 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds |
| 5507 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim |
| 5508 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. |
| 5509 | |
| 5510 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on |
| 5511 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it |
| 5512 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written |
| 5513 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of |
| 5514 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing |
| 5515 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a |
| 5516 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external |
| 5517 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of |
| 5518 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) |
| 5519 | |
| 5520 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript |
| 5521 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs |
| 5522 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard |
| 5523 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a |
| 5524 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external |
| 5525 | program. |
| 5526 | |
| 5527 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, |
| 5528 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these |
| 5529 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax |
| 5530 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name |
| 5531 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is |
| 5532 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. |
| 5533 | |
| 5534 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has |
| 5535 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on |
| 5536 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but |
| 5537 | was not documented clearly before. |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. |
| 5540 | This includes Tetris and Snake. |
| 5541 | \f |
| 5542 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 5543 | |
| 5544 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position |
| 5545 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. |
| 5546 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same |
| 5547 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. |
| 5548 | |
| 5549 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument |
| 5550 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, |
| 5551 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. |
| 5552 | |
| 5553 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. |
| 5554 | |
| 5555 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. |
| 5556 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. |
| 5557 | |
| 5558 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
| 5559 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two |
| 5560 | integers. |
| 5561 | |
| 5562 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of |
| 5563 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same |
| 5564 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that |
| 5565 | file names and attributes are returned. |
| 5566 | |
| 5567 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for |
| 5568 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It |
| 5569 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
| 5570 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
| 5571 | returns the result. |
| 5572 | |
| 5573 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern |
| 5574 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. |
| 5575 | |
| 5576 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: |
| 5577 | |
| 5578 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer |
| 5579 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region |
| 5580 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported |
| 5581 | optionally. |
| 5582 | |
| 5583 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar |
| 5584 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 | ** |
| 5587 | The new function process-running-child-p |
| 5588 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its |
| 5589 | terminal to its own child process. |
| 5590 | |
| 5591 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: |
| 5592 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal |
| 5593 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell |
| 5594 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. |
| 5595 | |
| 5596 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can |
| 5597 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. |
| 5598 | |
| 5599 | ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
| 5600 | :included is an alias for :visible. |
| 5601 | |
| 5602 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by |
| 5603 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used |
| 5604 | to move or copy menu entries. |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 | ** Multibyte editing changes |
| 5607 | |
| 5608 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is |
| 5609 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to |
| 5610 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also |
| 5611 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and |
| 5612 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: |
| 5613 | (setq char (sref str idx) |
| 5614 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) |
| 5615 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. |
| 5616 | |
| 5617 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character |
| 5618 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: |
| 5619 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) |
| 5620 | |
| 5621 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the |
| 5622 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or |
| 5623 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: |
| 5624 | |
| 5625 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
| 5626 | |
| 5627 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character |
| 5628 | across the boundary. |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include |
| 5631 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: |
| 5632 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and |
| 5633 | contains 8-bit characters. |
| 5634 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and |
| 5635 | contains invalid characters. |
| 5636 | |
| 5637 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove |
| 5638 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly |
| 5639 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing |
| 5640 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct |
| 5641 | way. |
| 5642 | |
| 5643 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. |
| 5644 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of |
| 5645 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by |
| 5646 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. |
| 5647 | |
| 5648 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly |
| 5649 | compose Thai characters in a string. |
| 5650 | |
| 5651 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third |
| 5652 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name |
| 5653 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as |
| 5654 | menus should always use the third argument. |
| 5655 | |
| 5656 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, |
| 5657 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second |
| 5658 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current |
| 5659 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. |
| 5660 | |
| 5661 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents |
| 5662 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in |
| 5663 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing |
| 5664 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in |
| 5667 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it |
| 5668 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous |
| 5669 | echo area contents. |
| 5670 | |
| 5671 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) |
| 5672 | |
| 5673 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument |
| 5674 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the |
| 5675 | requested feature cannot be loaded. |
| 5676 | |
| 5677 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the |
| 5678 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern |
| 5679 | means to clear out that attribute. |
| 5680 | |
| 5681 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame |
| 5682 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. |
| 5683 | |
| 5684 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now |
| 5685 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode |
| 5686 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the |
| 5687 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. |
| 5688 | |
| 5689 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on |
| 5690 | the gap of the current buffer. |
| 5691 | |
| 5692 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way |
| 5693 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the |
| 5694 | current buffer. |
| 5695 | |
| 5696 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to |
| 5697 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. |
| 5698 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check |
| 5699 | it back in after any modifications have been made. |
| 5700 | \f |
| 5701 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
| 5702 | |
| 5703 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of |
| 5704 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and |
| 5705 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those |
| 5706 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and |
| 5707 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. |
| 5708 | |
| 5709 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose |
| 5710 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. |
| 5711 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory |
| 5712 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use |
| 5713 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. |
| 5714 | |
| 5715 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it |
| 5716 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each |
| 5717 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. |
| 5718 | |
| 5719 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs |
| 5720 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically |
| 5721 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the |
| 5722 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a |
| 5723 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired |
| 5724 | results. |
| 5725 | |
| 5726 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from |
| 5727 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers |
| 5728 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in |
| 5729 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. |
| 5730 | \f |
| 5731 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
| 5732 | |
| 5733 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command |
| 5734 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, |
| 5735 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can |
| 5736 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. |
| 5737 | |
| 5738 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a |
| 5739 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired |
| 5740 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing |
| 5741 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo |
| 5742 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made |
| 5743 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them |
| 5744 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that |
| 5745 | region. |
| 5746 | |
| 5747 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests |
| 5748 | selective undo. |
| 5749 | |
| 5750 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are |
| 5751 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte |
| 5752 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same |
| 5753 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs |
| 5754 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. |
| 5755 | |
| 5756 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, |
| 5757 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use |
| 5758 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to |
| 5759 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. |
| 5760 | |
| 5761 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and |
| 5762 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the |
| 5763 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is |
| 5764 | something that most users not do. |
| 5765 | |
| 5766 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste |
| 5767 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. |
| 5768 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other |
| 5769 | applications. |
| 5770 | |
| 5771 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and |
| 5772 | pasting operations. |
| 5773 | |
| 5774 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by |
| 5775 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks |
| 5776 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different |
| 5777 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting |
| 5778 | `ps-printer-name'. |
| 5779 | |
| 5780 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a |
| 5781 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember |
| 5782 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it |
| 5783 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting |
| 5784 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor |
| 5785 | hits a new word. |
| 5786 | |
| 5787 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for |
| 5788 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not |
| 5789 | to be confused by TeX commands. |
| 5790 | |
| 5791 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something |
| 5792 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by |
| 5793 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu |
| 5794 | of various alternative replacements and actions. |
| 5795 | |
| 5796 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces |
| 5797 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several |
| 5798 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in |
| 5799 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if |
| 5800 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. |
| 5801 | |
| 5802 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if |
| 5803 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. |
| 5804 | |
| 5805 | ** Changes in input method usage. |
| 5806 | |
| 5807 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among |
| 5808 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p |
| 5809 | respectively. |
| 5810 | |
| 5811 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one |
| 5814 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. |
| 5815 | |
| 5816 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so |
| 5817 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. |
| 5818 | |
| 5819 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. |
| 5820 | |
| 5821 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. |
| 5822 | |
| 5823 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only |
| 5824 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. |
| 5825 | |
| 5826 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is |
| 5827 | given in the following case: |
| 5828 | o When you are using a complex input method. |
| 5829 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. |
| 5830 | |
| 5831 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting |
| 5832 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, |
| 5833 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, |
| 5834 | setting it to t is helpful. |
| 5835 | |
| 5836 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. |
| 5837 | |
| 5838 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following |
| 5839 | keys: |
| 5840 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method |
| 5841 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc |
| 5842 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja |
| 5843 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language |
| 5844 | environment. |
| 5845 | |
| 5846 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file |
| 5847 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the |
| 5848 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to |
| 5849 | get |
| 5850 | |
| 5851 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd |
| 5852 | |
| 5853 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. |
| 5854 | |
| 5855 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. |
| 5856 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. |
| 5857 | |
| 5858 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t |
| 5859 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve |
| 5860 | its owner and group. |
| 5861 | |
| 5862 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs |
| 5863 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. |
| 5864 | |
| 5865 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle |
| 5866 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. |
| 5867 | |
| 5868 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle |
| 5869 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column |
| 5870 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified |
| 5871 | by the left edge of the rectangle. |
| 5872 | |
| 5873 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, |
| 5874 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit |
| 5875 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful |
| 5876 | for writing keyboard macros. |
| 5877 | |
| 5878 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, |
| 5879 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The |
| 5880 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as |
| 5881 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define |
| 5882 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and |
| 5883 | info. |
| 5884 | |
| 5885 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. |
| 5886 | |
| 5887 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x |
| 5888 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region |
| 5889 | contents only. |
| 5890 | |
| 5891 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for |
| 5892 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call |
| 5893 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM |
| 5894 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. |
| 5895 | |
| 5896 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited |
| 5897 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file |
| 5898 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. |
| 5899 | |
| 5900 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature |
| 5901 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. |
| 5902 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is |
| 5903 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. |
| 5904 | |
| 5905 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or |
| 5906 | failure if the command produces no output. |
| 5907 | |
| 5908 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window |
| 5909 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move |
| 5910 | the mouse. |
| 5911 | |
| 5912 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to |
| 5913 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related |
| 5914 | function and variable names. |
| 5915 | |
| 5916 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for |
| 5917 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than |
| 5918 | file-coding-system-alist. |
| 5919 | |
| 5920 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to |
| 5921 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by |
| 5922 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to |
| 5923 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed |
| 5924 | according to the current fontset. |
| 5925 | |
| 5926 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. |
| 5927 | |
| 5928 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of |
| 5929 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and |
| 5930 | nonascii-insert-offset. |
| 5931 | |
| 5932 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if |
| 5933 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table |
| 5934 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte |
| 5935 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. |
| 5936 | |
| 5937 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get |
| 5938 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. |
| 5939 | |
| 5940 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case |
| 5941 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. |
| 5942 | |
| 5943 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables |
| 5944 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant |
| 5945 | command keys. |
| 5946 | |
| 5947 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for |
| 5948 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. |
| 5949 | |
| 5950 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for |
| 5951 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at |
| 5952 | all variables that have documentation. |
| 5953 | |
| 5954 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer |
| 5955 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way |
| 5956 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable |
| 5957 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap |
| 5958 | it should show; the default is 20. |
| 5959 | |
| 5960 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, |
| 5961 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole |
| 5962 | of your input. |
| 5963 | |
| 5964 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize |
| 5965 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in |
| 5966 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as |
| 5967 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all |
| 5968 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. |
| 5969 | Newly added options are included as well. |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, |
| 5972 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options |
| 5973 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. |
| 5974 | |
| 5975 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the |
| 5976 | Customize menu. |
| 5977 | |
| 5978 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out |
| 5979 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. |
| 5980 | |
| 5981 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of |
| 5982 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were |
| 5983 | invoked. |
| 5984 | |
| 5985 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces |
| 5986 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. |
| 5987 | The default is 1. |
| 5988 | |
| 5989 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol |
| 5990 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has |
| 5991 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram |
| 5992 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block |
| 5993 | sensibly. |
| 5994 | |
| 5995 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. |
| 5996 | |
| 5997 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil |
| 5998 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make |
| 5999 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. |
| 6000 | |
| 6001 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a |
| 6002 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string |
| 6003 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically |
| 6004 | every night. |
| 6005 | |
| 6006 | ** Desktop changes |
| 6007 | |
| 6008 | *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set |
| 6009 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
| 6010 | |
| 6011 | *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored |
| 6012 | and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. |
| 6013 | |
| 6014 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
| 6015 | read and post multi-lingual articles. |
| 6016 | |
| 6017 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when |
| 6018 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should |
| 6019 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden |
| 6020 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and |
| 6021 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is |
| 6022 | made invisible again. |
| 6023 | |
| 6024 | ** Mail reading and sending changes |
| 6025 | |
| 6026 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of |
| 6027 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any |
| 6028 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently |
| 6029 | toggle. |
| 6030 | |
| 6031 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, |
| 6032 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the |
| 6033 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if |
| 6034 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable |
| 6035 | rmail-default-body-file. |
| 6036 | |
| 6037 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no |
| 6038 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they |
| 6039 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. |
| 6040 | |
| 6041 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, |
| 6042 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression |
| 6043 | is evaluated to insert the signature. |
| 6044 | |
| 6045 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of |
| 6046 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email |
| 6047 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for |
| 6048 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for |
| 6049 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be |
| 6050 | especially interested in trying feedmail. |
| 6051 | |
| 6052 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of |
| 6053 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features |
| 6054 | provided by feedmail are: |
| 6055 | |
| 6056 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and |
| 6057 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); |
| 6058 | there is also a queue for draft messages |
| 6059 | |
| 6060 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and |
| 6061 | be prompted for confirmation |
| 6062 | |
| 6063 | **** does smart filling of address headers |
| 6064 | |
| 6065 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be |
| 6066 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this |
| 6067 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get |
| 6068 | |
| 6069 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting |
| 6070 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, |
| 6071 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new |
| 6072 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) |
| 6073 | |
| 6074 | ** Dired changes |
| 6075 | |
| 6076 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked |
| 6077 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". |
| 6078 | |
| 6079 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily |
| 6080 | run Dired on the directory name at point. |
| 6081 | |
| 6082 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of |
| 6083 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match |
| 6084 | for a specified regexp. |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 | ** VC Changes |
| 6087 | |
| 6088 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control |
| 6089 | conveniently. |
| 6090 | |
| 6091 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much |
| 6092 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary |
| 6093 | Dired. |
| 6094 | |
| 6095 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the |
| 6096 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive |
| 6097 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are |
| 6098 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). |
| 6099 | |
| 6100 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, |
| 6101 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set |
| 6102 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version |
| 6103 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' |
| 6104 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which |
| 6107 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type |
| 6108 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on |
| 6109 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes |
| 6110 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. |
| 6111 | |
| 6112 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to |
| 6113 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all |
| 6114 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
| 6115 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
| 6116 | |
| 6117 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in |
| 6118 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls |
| 6119 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. |
| 6120 | |
| 6121 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working |
| 6122 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff |
| 6123 | session to resolve them. |
| 6124 | |
| 6125 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to |
| 6126 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that |
| 6127 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS |
| 6128 | uses as well). |
| 6129 | |
| 6130 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new |
| 6131 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When |
| 6132 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify |
| 6133 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that |
| 6134 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. |
| 6135 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, |
| 6136 | using ediff. |
| 6137 | |
| 6138 | ** Changes in Font Lock |
| 6139 | |
| 6140 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face |
| 6141 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical |
| 6142 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are |
| 6143 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for |
| 6144 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. |
| 6145 | |
| 6146 | ** Frame name display changes |
| 6147 | |
| 6148 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current |
| 6149 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and |
| 6150 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or |
| 6151 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. |
| 6152 | |
| 6153 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the |
| 6154 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames |
| 6155 | menu. |
| 6156 | |
| 6157 | ** Comint (subshell) changes |
| 6158 | |
| 6159 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a |
| 6160 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility |
| 6161 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. |
| 6162 | |
| 6163 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. |
| 6164 | |
| 6165 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; |
| 6166 | that is, the line after the last line you got. |
| 6167 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. |
| 6168 | |
| 6169 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to |
| 6170 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send |
| 6171 | the following line. |
| 6172 | |
| 6173 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, |
| 6174 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the |
| 6175 | previously sent input. |
| 6176 | |
| 6177 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; |
| 6178 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input |
| 6179 | as the search string. |
| 6180 | |
| 6181 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll |
| 6182 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. |
| 6183 | |
| 6184 | ** C mode changes |
| 6185 | |
| 6186 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, |
| 6187 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is |
| 6188 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro |
| 6189 | definition. |
| 6190 | |
| 6191 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified |
| 6192 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. |
| 6193 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" |
| 6194 | style is still the default however. |
| 6195 | |
| 6196 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. |
| 6197 | |
| 6198 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which |
| 6199 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer |
| 6200 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. |
| 6201 | |
| 6202 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) |
| 6203 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). |
| 6204 | |
| 6205 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols |
| 6206 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. |
| 6207 | |
| 6208 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets |
| 6209 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. |
| 6210 | |
| 6211 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, |
| 6212 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. |
| 6213 | |
| 6214 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You |
| 6215 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire |
| 6216 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new |
| 6217 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. |
| 6218 | |
| 6219 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. |
| 6220 | |
| 6221 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
| 6222 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
| 6223 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. |
| 6224 | |
| 6225 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If |
| 6226 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when |
| 6227 | expanding dynamically. |
| 6228 | |
| 6229 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If |
| 6230 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. |
| 6231 | |
| 6232 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If |
| 6233 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in |
| 6234 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose |
| 6235 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. |
| 6236 | |
| 6237 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. |
| 6238 | |
| 6239 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 6240 | |
| 6241 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable |
| 6242 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during |
| 6243 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable |
| 6244 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches |
| 6245 | against the first word in the title. |
| 6246 | |
| 6247 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just |
| 6248 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, |
| 6249 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with |
| 6250 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
| 6251 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
| 6252 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
| 6253 | |
| 6254 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key |
| 6255 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is |
| 6256 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and |
| 6257 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. |
| 6258 | |
| 6259 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. |
| 6260 | |
| 6261 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap |
| 6262 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A |
| 6263 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be |
| 6264 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including |
| 6265 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency |
| 6266 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. |
| 6267 | |
| 6268 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the |
| 6269 | Editing group once the package is loaded. |
| 6270 | |
| 6271 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is |
| 6272 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set |
| 6273 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
| 6274 | |
| 6275 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the |
| 6276 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. |
| 6277 | |
| 6278 | ** Ispell changes. |
| 6279 | |
| 6280 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
| 6281 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings |
| 6282 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
| 6283 | |
| 6284 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. |
| 6285 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will |
| 6286 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user |
| 6287 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this |
| 6288 | include: |
| 6289 | |
| 6290 | o URLs are automatically skipped |
| 6291 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. |
| 6292 | |
| 6293 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. |
| 6294 | |
| 6295 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 6296 | |
| 6297 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very |
| 6298 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been |
| 6299 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the |
| 6300 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. |
| 6301 | |
| 6302 | *** New recursive parser. |
| 6303 | |
| 6304 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the |
| 6305 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new |
| 6306 | recursive parser scans the individual files. |
| 6307 | |
| 6308 | *** Parsing only part of a document. |
| 6309 | |
| 6310 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
| 6311 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of |
| 6312 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. |
| 6313 | |
| 6314 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) |
| 6315 | |
| 6316 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. |
| 6317 | |
| 6318 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use |
| 6319 | |
| 6320 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) |
| 6321 | |
| 6322 | *** Using multiple selection buffers |
| 6323 | |
| 6324 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens |
| 6325 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting |
| 6326 | |
| 6327 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) |
| 6328 | |
| 6329 | *** References to external documents. |
| 6330 | |
| 6331 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external |
| 6332 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external |
| 6333 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument |
| 6334 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with |
| 6335 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in |
| 6336 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). |
| 6337 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. |
| 6338 | |
| 6339 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. |
| 6340 | |
| 6341 | The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
| 6342 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
| 6343 | |
| 6344 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes |
| 6345 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. |
| 6346 | |
| 6347 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers |
| 6348 | |
| 6349 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* |
| 6350 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. |
| 6351 | |
| 6352 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. |
| 6353 | |
| 6354 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of |
| 6355 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', |
| 6356 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes |
| 6357 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you |
| 6358 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' |
| 6359 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out |
| 6360 | more. |
| 6361 | |
| 6362 | *** Support for the varioref package |
| 6363 | |
| 6364 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. |
| 6365 | |
| 6366 | *** New hooks |
| 6367 | |
| 6368 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, |
| 6369 | and citations are created. These hooks are |
| 6370 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', |
| 6371 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. |
| 6372 | |
| 6373 | *** Citations outside LaTeX |
| 6374 | |
| 6375 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in |
| 6376 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. |
| 6377 | |
| 6378 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. |
| 6379 | |
| 6380 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the |
| 6381 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be |
| 6382 | fontified, use |
| 6383 | |
| 6384 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) |
| 6385 | |
| 6386 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. |
| 6387 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of |
| 6388 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other |
| 6389 | directories that contain the same file name. |
| 6390 | |
| 6391 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file |
| 6392 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary |
| 6393 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to |
| 6394 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that |
| 6395 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer |
| 6396 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other |
| 6397 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present |
| 6398 | directory. |
| 6399 | |
| 6400 | ** New modes and packages |
| 6401 | |
| 6402 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. |
| 6403 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer |
| 6404 | it, but some do not. |
| 6405 | |
| 6406 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL |
| 6407 | code. |
| 6408 | |
| 6409 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the |
| 6410 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move |
| 6411 | around in a buffer. |
| 6412 | |
| 6413 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. |
| 6414 | |
| 6415 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author |
| 6416 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should |
| 6417 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an |
| 6418 | established system of notation similar to Chess. |
| 6419 | |
| 6420 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp |
| 6421 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style |
| 6422 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. |
| 6423 | |
| 6424 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features |
| 6425 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around |
| 6426 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of |
| 6427 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also |
| 6428 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and |
| 6429 | the like. |
| 6430 | |
| 6431 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to |
| 6432 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. |
| 6433 | |
| 6434 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done |
| 6435 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not |
| 6436 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize |
| 6437 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. |
| 6438 | |
| 6439 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. |
| 6440 | |
| 6441 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files |
| 6442 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files |
| 6443 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files |
| 6444 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files |
| 6445 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) |
| 6446 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files |
| 6447 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files |
| 6448 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files |
| 6449 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files |
| 6450 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files |
| 6451 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files |
| 6452 | |
| 6453 | Platform-specific modes: |
| 6454 | |
| 6455 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files |
| 6456 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files |
| 6457 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files |
| 6458 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files |
| 6459 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files |
| 6460 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files |
| 6461 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts |
| 6462 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files |
| 6463 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts |
| 6464 | \f |
| 6465 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
| 6466 | |
| 6467 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, |
| 6468 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. |
| 6469 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. |
| 6470 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. |
| 6471 | |
| 6472 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether |
| 6473 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives |
| 6474 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. |
| 6475 | |
| 6476 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, |
| 6477 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can |
| 6478 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for |
| 6479 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. |
| 6480 | |
| 6481 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and |
| 6482 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte |
| 6483 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language |
| 6484 | environment. |
| 6485 | |
| 6486 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now |
| 6487 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt |
| 6488 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the |
| 6489 | current input method for reading this one event. |
| 6490 | |
| 6491 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte |
| 6492 | now control whether to output certain characters as |
| 6493 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte |
| 6494 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte |
| 6495 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing |
| 6496 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). |
| 6497 | \f |
| 6498 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
| 6499 | |
| 6500 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version |
| 6501 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. |
| 6502 | |
| 6503 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were |
| 6504 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) |
| 6505 | always increases point by 1. |
| 6506 | |
| 6507 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is |
| 6508 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. |
| 6509 | |
| 6510 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. |
| 6511 | |
| 6512 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. |
| 6513 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's |
| 6514 | default value changed. For example, |
| 6515 | |
| 6516 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." |
| 6517 | :type 'integer |
| 6518 | :group 'foo |
| 6519 | :version "20.3") |
| 6520 | |
| 6521 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
| 6522 | :version "20.3") |
| 6523 | |
| 6524 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the |
| 6525 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It |
| 6526 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a |
| 6527 | `:version' in the top level group. |
| 6528 | |
| 6529 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. |
| 6530 | |
| 6531 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name |
| 6532 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. |
| 6533 | |
| 6534 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that |
| 6535 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that |
| 6536 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables |
| 6537 | to themselves. |
| 6538 | |
| 6539 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, |
| 6540 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any |
| 6541 | values whatever. |
| 6542 | |
| 6543 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. |
| 6544 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result |
| 6545 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. |
| 6546 | |
| 6547 | ** Frame-local variables. |
| 6548 | |
| 6549 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call |
| 6550 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have |
| 6551 | local bindings for that variable. |
| 6552 | |
| 6553 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a |
| 6554 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling |
| 6555 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the |
| 6556 | parameter name. |
| 6557 | |
| 6558 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. |
| 6559 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is |
| 6560 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, |
| 6561 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. |
| 6562 | |
| 6563 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not |
| 6564 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a |
| 6565 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect |
| 6566 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. |
| 6567 | |
| 6568 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing |
| 6569 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when |
| 6570 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form |
| 6571 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. |
| 6572 | See the documentation in sregex.el. |
| 6573 | |
| 6574 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which |
| 6575 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to |
| 6576 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. |
| 6577 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. |
| 6578 | |
| 6579 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. |
| 6580 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. |
| 6581 | |
| 6582 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from |
| 6583 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can |
| 6584 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. |
| 6585 | |
| 6586 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE |
| 6587 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as |
| 6588 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the |
| 6589 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. |
| 6590 | |
| 6591 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to |
| 6592 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters |
| 6593 | empty input. |
| 6594 | |
| 6595 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use |
| 6596 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to |
| 6597 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. |
| 6598 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as |
| 6599 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. |
| 6600 | |
| 6601 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, |
| 6602 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: |
| 6603 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a |
| 6604 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. |
| 6605 | |
| 6606 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to |
| 6607 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a |
| 6608 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the |
| 6609 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns |
| 6610 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. |
| 6611 | |
| 6612 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. |
| 6613 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate |
| 6614 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the |
| 6615 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. |
| 6616 | |
| 6617 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME |
| 6618 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. |
| 6619 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. |
| 6620 | |
| 6621 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, |
| 6622 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window |
| 6623 | was directed to display this buffer. |
| 6624 | |
| 6625 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects |
| 6626 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they |
| 6627 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in |
| 6628 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to |
| 6629 | set-window-configuration. |
| 6630 | |
| 6631 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two |
| 6632 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer |
| 6633 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of |
| 6634 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. |
| 6635 | |
| 6636 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to |
| 6637 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist |
| 6638 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). |
| 6639 | |
| 6640 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a |
| 6641 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the |
| 6642 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. |
| 6643 | |
| 6644 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, |
| 6645 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. |
| 6646 | |
| 6647 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string |
| 6648 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. |
| 6649 | |
| 6650 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument |
| 6651 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as |
| 6652 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. |
| 6653 | |
| 6654 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory |
| 6655 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined |
| 6656 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems |
| 6657 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. |
| 6658 | |
| 6659 | ** Menu changes |
| 6660 | |
| 6661 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the |
| 6662 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now |
| 6663 | better supported. |
| 6664 | |
| 6665 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls |
| 6666 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when |
| 6667 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you |
| 6668 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; |
| 6669 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. |
| 6670 | |
| 6671 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. |
| 6672 | |
| 6673 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format |
| 6674 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) |
| 6675 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that |
| 6676 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. |
| 6677 | |
| 6678 | The format is: |
| 6679 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or |
| 6680 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) |
| 6681 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item |
| 6682 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. |
| 6683 | The supported properties include |
| 6684 | |
| 6685 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
| 6686 | item is enabled. |
| 6687 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
| 6688 | item should appear in the menu. |
| 6689 | :filter FILTER-FN |
| 6690 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
| 6691 | which will be REAL-BINDING. |
| 6692 | It should return a binding to use instead. |
| 6693 | :keys DESCRIPTION |
| 6694 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard |
| 6695 | binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
| 6696 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
| 6697 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE |
| 6698 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent |
| 6699 | keyboard binding. |
| 6700 | :key-sequence nil |
| 6701 | This means that the command normally has no |
| 6702 | keyboard equivalent. |
| 6703 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). |
| 6704 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) |
| 6705 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. |
| 6706 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its |
| 6707 | value says whether this button is currently selected. |
| 6708 | |
| 6709 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. |
| 6710 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. |
| 6711 | |
| 6712 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. |
| 6713 | |
| 6714 | ** New event types |
| 6715 | |
| 6716 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a |
| 6717 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that |
| 6718 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, |
| 6719 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: |
| 6720 | |
| 6721 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) |
| 6722 | |
| 6723 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
| 6724 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number |
| 6725 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A |
| 6726 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards |
| 6727 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated |
| 6728 | forward, away from the user. |
| 6729 | |
| 6730 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
| 6731 | |
| 6732 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of |
| 6733 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged |
| 6734 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of |
| 6735 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically |
| 6736 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: |
| 6737 | |
| 6738 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) |
| 6739 | |
| 6740 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
| 6741 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames |
| 6742 | that were dragged and dropped. |
| 6743 | |
| 6744 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
| 6745 | |
| 6746 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. |
| 6747 | |
| 6748 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; |
| 6749 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way |
| 6750 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. |
| 6751 | |
| 6752 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You |
| 6753 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character |
| 6754 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. |
| 6755 | |
| 6756 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were |
| 6757 | in Emacs 19 and before. |
| 6758 | |
| 6759 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. |
| 6760 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. |
| 6761 | |
| 6762 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current |
| 6763 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or |
| 6764 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte |
| 6765 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. |
| 6766 | |
| 6767 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed |
| 6768 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents |
| 6769 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as |
| 6770 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation |
| 6771 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. |
| 6772 | |
| 6773 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which |
| 6774 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer |
| 6775 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are |
| 6776 | consistent with the new representation. |
| 6777 | |
| 6778 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte |
| 6779 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care |
| 6780 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; |
| 6781 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
| 6782 | |
| 6783 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of |
| 6784 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them |
| 6785 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. |
| 6786 | |
| 6787 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte |
| 6788 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the |
| 6789 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
| 6790 | |
| 6791 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation |
| 6792 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically |
| 6793 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. |
| 6794 | |
| 6795 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
| 6796 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. |
| 6797 | |
| 6798 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
| 6799 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. |
| 6800 | |
| 6801 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare |
| 6802 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, |
| 6803 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. |
| 6804 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. |
| 6805 | |
| 6806 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that |
| 6807 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. |
| 6808 | |
| 6809 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now |
| 6810 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the |
| 6811 | buffer or string being searched. |
| 6812 | |
| 6813 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of |
| 6814 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when |
| 6815 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when |
| 6816 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no |
| 6817 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what |
| 6818 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular |
| 6819 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. |
| 6820 | |
| 6821 | *** Structure of coding system changed. |
| 6822 | |
| 6823 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named |
| 6824 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector |
| 6825 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector |
| 6826 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this |
| 6827 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define |
| 6828 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function |
| 6829 | define-coding-system-alias. |
| 6830 | |
| 6831 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use |
| 6832 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to |
| 6833 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, |
| 6834 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, |
| 6835 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and |
| 6836 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 |
| 6837 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter |
| 6838 | `iso-8859-1'. |
| 6839 | |
| 6840 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. |
| 6841 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this |
| 6842 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: |
| 6843 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) |
| 6844 | |
| 6845 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can |
| 6846 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they |
| 6847 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode |
| 6848 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. |
| 6849 | |
| 6850 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a |
| 6851 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. |
| 6852 | This function requires a user interaction. |
| 6853 | |
| 6854 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and |
| 6855 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by |
| 6856 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding |
| 6857 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want |
| 6858 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of |
| 6859 | select-safe-coding-system. |
| 6860 | |
| 6861 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as |
| 6862 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set |
| 6863 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding |
| 6864 | was done. |
| 6865 | |
| 6866 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be |
| 6867 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of |
| 6868 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. |
| 6869 | |
| 6870 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always |
| 6871 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII |
| 6872 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element |
| 6873 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. |
| 6874 | |
| 6875 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and |
| 6876 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different |
| 6877 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is |
| 6878 | converted. |
| 6879 | |
| 6880 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a |
| 6881 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. |
| 6882 | |
| 6883 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid |
| 6884 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire |
| 6885 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, |
| 6886 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value |
| 6887 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a |
| 6888 | range of characters. |
| 6889 | |
| 6890 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a |
| 6891 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. |
| 6892 | |
| 6893 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character |
| 6894 | in the current buffer at position POS. |
| 6895 | |
| 6896 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable |
| 6897 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a |
| 6898 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing |
| 6899 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the |
| 6900 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first |
| 6901 | binding input-method-function to nil. |
| 6902 | |
| 6903 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input |
| 6904 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as |
| 6905 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by |
| 6906 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, |
| 6907 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. |
| 6908 | |
| 6909 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and |
| 6910 | subsequent events of a key sequence. |
| 6911 | |
| 6912 | *** You can customize any language environment by using |
| 6913 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. |
| 6914 | |
| 6915 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo |
| 6916 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For |
| 6917 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language |
| 6918 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up |
| 6919 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. |
| 6920 | \f |
| 6921 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
| 6922 | |
| 6923 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user |
| 6924 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look |
| 6925 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a |
| 6926 | tree structure. |
| 6927 | |
| 6928 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each |
| 6929 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. |
| 6930 | |
| 6931 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs |
| 6932 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically |
| 6933 | in your .emacs file.) |
| 6934 | |
| 6935 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. |
| 6936 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. |
| 6937 | |
| 6938 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. |
| 6939 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. |
| 6940 | |
| 6941 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted |
| 6942 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it |
| 6943 | kills the region. |
| 6944 | |
| 6945 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they |
| 6946 | delete the character before point, as usual. |
| 6947 | |
| 6948 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted |
| 6949 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature |
| 6950 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) |
| 6951 | |
| 6952 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to |
| 6953 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, |
| 6954 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked |
| 6955 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the |
| 6956 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the |
| 6957 | past.) |
| 6958 | |
| 6959 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. |
| 6960 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode |
| 6961 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). |
| 6962 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this |
| 6963 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. |
| 6964 | |
| 6965 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, |
| 6966 | and is an alias for it. |
| 6967 | |
| 6968 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, |
| 6969 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. |
| 6970 | |
| 6971 | ** Scrolling changes |
| 6972 | |
| 6973 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen |
| 6974 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. |
| 6975 | |
| 6976 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing |
| 6977 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line |
| 6978 | where it started. |
| 6979 | |
| 6980 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you |
| 6981 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the |
| 6982 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that |
| 6983 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. |
| 6984 | |
| 6985 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the |
| 6986 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point |
| 6987 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs |
| 6988 | recenters the window. |
| 6989 | |
| 6990 | ** International character set support (MULE) |
| 6991 | |
| 6992 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, |
| 6993 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, |
| 6994 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, |
| 6995 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These |
| 6996 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as |
| 6997 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") |
| 6998 | |
| 6999 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard |
| 7000 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte |
| 7001 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide |
| 7002 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back |
| 7003 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. |
| 7004 | |
| 7005 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, |
| 7006 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs |
| 7007 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or |
| 7008 | language, to make it possible to type them. |
| 7009 | |
| 7010 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII |
| 7011 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. |
| 7012 | |
| 7013 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain |
| 7014 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. |
| 7015 | |
| 7016 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: |
| 7017 | |
| 7018 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) |
| 7019 | |
| 7020 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte |
| 7021 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second |
| 7022 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are |
| 7023 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte |
| 7024 | characters for their work until they want to change. |
| 7025 | |
| 7026 | *** Input methods |
| 7027 | |
| 7028 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed |
| 7029 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language |
| 7030 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use |
| 7031 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages |
| 7032 | support several input methods. |
| 7033 | |
| 7034 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into |
| 7035 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods |
| 7036 | work. |
| 7037 | |
| 7038 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of |
| 7039 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use |
| 7040 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which |
| 7041 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one |
| 7042 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single |
| 7043 | letter. |
| 7044 | |
| 7045 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed |
| 7046 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. |
| 7047 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone |
| 7048 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are |
| 7049 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". |
| 7050 | |
| 7051 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so |
| 7052 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using |
| 7053 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs |
| 7054 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. |
| 7055 | |
| 7056 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled |
| 7057 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; |
| 7058 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if |
| 7059 | the first guess is wrong. |
| 7060 | |
| 7061 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) |
| 7062 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. |
| 7063 | |
| 7064 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each |
| 7065 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as |
| 7066 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for |
| 7067 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. |
| 7068 | |
| 7069 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to |
| 7070 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set |
| 7071 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can |
| 7072 | translate automatically to and from either one. |
| 7073 | |
| 7074 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. |
| 7075 | |
| 7076 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a |
| 7077 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte |
| 7078 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not |
| 7079 | what you want. |
| 7080 | |
| 7081 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for |
| 7082 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding |
| 7083 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off |
| 7084 | multibyte characters in that buffer. |
| 7085 | |
| 7086 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off |
| 7087 | character conversion as well. |
| 7088 | |
| 7089 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. |
| 7090 | |
| 7091 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. |
| 7092 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports |
| 7093 | requires using many fonts. |
| 7094 | |
| 7095 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a |
| 7096 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. |
| 7097 | |
| 7098 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by |
| 7099 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you |
| 7100 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as |
| 7101 | you would use a font. |
| 7102 | |
| 7103 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it |
| 7104 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot |
| 7105 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. |
| 7106 | |
| 7107 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters |
| 7108 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII |
| 7109 | characters). |
| 7110 | |
| 7111 | *** Defining fontsets. |
| 7112 | |
| 7113 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still |
| 7114 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset |
| 7115 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. |
| 7116 | |
| 7117 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value |
| 7118 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is |
| 7119 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the |
| 7120 | standard fontset are created automatically. |
| 7121 | |
| 7122 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' |
| 7123 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the |
| 7124 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name |
| 7125 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short |
| 7126 | name is `fontset-startup'. |
| 7127 | |
| 7128 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... |
| 7129 | The resource value should have this form: |
| 7130 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... |
| 7131 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: |
| 7132 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". |
| 7133 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" |
| 7134 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. |
| 7135 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number |
| 7136 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. |
| 7137 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
| 7138 | should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
| 7139 | |
| 7140 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the |
| 7141 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. |
| 7142 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. |
| 7143 | |
| 7144 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a |
| 7145 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the |
| 7146 | following resource, |
| 7147 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 |
| 7148 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: |
| 7149 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 |
| 7150 | Here is the substitution rule: |
| 7151 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset |
| 7152 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has |
| 7153 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce |
| 7154 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. |
| 7155 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) |
| 7156 | |
| 7157 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the |
| 7158 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call |
| 7159 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. |
| 7160 | |
| 7161 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just |
| 7162 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset |
| 7163 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the |
| 7164 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle |
| 7165 | fontsets. |
| 7166 | |
| 7167 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs |
| 7168 | defaults for a particular choice of language. |
| 7169 | |
| 7170 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input |
| 7171 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when |
| 7172 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have |
| 7173 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The |
| 7174 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding |
| 7175 | system for new files that you create. |
| 7176 | |
| 7177 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use |
| 7178 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the |
| 7179 | whole Emacs session. |
| 7180 | |
| 7181 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET |
| 7182 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this |
| 7183 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). |
| 7184 | |
| 7185 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) |
| 7186 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This |
| 7187 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving |
| 7188 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the |
| 7189 | coding systems that Emacs supports. |
| 7190 | |
| 7191 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) |
| 7192 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. |
| 7193 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. |
| 7194 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system |
| 7195 | is used for *the immediately following command*. |
| 7196 | |
| 7197 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or |
| 7198 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. |
| 7199 | |
| 7200 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, |
| 7201 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. |
| 7202 | |
| 7203 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
| 7204 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
| 7205 | |
| 7206 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- |
| 7207 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- |
| 7208 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also |
| 7209 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end |
| 7210 | of the file. |
| 7211 | |
| 7212 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies |
| 7213 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character |
| 7214 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are |
| 7215 | translated into that character code. |
| 7216 | |
| 7217 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in |
| 7218 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. |
| 7219 | |
| 7220 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. |
| 7221 | |
| 7222 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies |
| 7223 | the coding system for keyboard input. |
| 7224 | |
| 7225 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals |
| 7226 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, |
| 7227 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. |
| 7228 | |
| 7229 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. |
| 7230 | |
| 7231 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an |
| 7232 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that |
| 7233 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed |
| 7234 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are |
| 7235 | designed to work with terminals. |
| 7236 | |
| 7237 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) |
| 7238 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. |
| 7239 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess |
| 7240 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify |
| 7241 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command |
| 7242 | in the corresponding buffer. |
| 7243 | |
| 7244 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. |
| 7245 | |
| 7246 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system |
| 7247 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. |
| 7248 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. |
| 7249 | |
| 7250 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates |
| 7251 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the |
| 7252 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you |
| 7253 | want to use. |
| 7254 | |
| 7255 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input |
| 7256 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. |
| 7257 | |
| 7258 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard |
| 7259 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this |
| 7260 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify |
| 7261 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. |
| 7262 | |
| 7263 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays |
| 7264 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus |
| 7265 | related information. |
| 7266 | |
| 7267 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called |
| 7268 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various |
| 7269 | scripts. |
| 7270 | |
| 7271 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays |
| 7272 | information about the support for a particular language. |
| 7273 | You specify the language as an argument. |
| 7274 | |
| 7275 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies |
| 7276 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the |
| 7277 | first dash. |
| 7278 | |
| 7279 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion |
| 7280 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion |
| 7281 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits |
| 7282 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: |
| 7283 | |
| 7284 | A alternativnyj (Russian) |
| 7285 | B big5 (Chinese) |
| 7286 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) |
| 7287 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) |
| 7288 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) |
| 7289 | E euc-japan (Japanese) |
| 7290 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
| 7291 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) |
| 7292 | K euc-korea (Korean) |
| 7293 | R koi8 (Russian) |
| 7294 | Q tibetan |
| 7295 | S shift_jis (Japanese) |
| 7296 | T lao |
| 7297 | T tis620 (Thai) |
| 7298 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) |
| 7299 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
| 7300 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) |
| 7301 | v viqr (Vietnamese) |
| 7302 | z hz (Chinese) |
| 7303 | |
| 7304 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), |
| 7305 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file |
| 7306 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for |
| 7307 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. |
| 7308 | |
| 7309 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code |
| 7310 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. |
| 7311 | |
| 7312 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically |
| 7313 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with |
| 7314 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing |
| 7315 | Rmail files themselves. |
| 7316 | |
| 7317 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code |
| 7318 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. |
| 7319 | |
| 7320 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system |
| 7321 | for sending mail: |
| 7322 | |
| 7323 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. |
| 7324 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. |
| 7325 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, |
| 7326 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. |
| 7327 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. |
| 7328 | |
| 7329 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument |
| 7330 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, |
| 7331 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional |
| 7332 | translations. |
| 7333 | |
| 7334 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion |
| 7335 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command |
| 7336 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer |
| 7337 | without any conversion. |
| 7338 | |
| 7339 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. |
| 7340 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. |
| 7341 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; |
| 7342 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. |
| 7343 | |
| 7344 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for |
| 7345 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. |
| 7346 | |
| 7347 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. |
| 7348 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. |
| 7349 | |
| 7350 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major |
| 7351 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. |
| 7352 | |
| 7353 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command |
| 7354 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name |
| 7355 | in the buffer before point. |
| 7356 | |
| 7357 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of |
| 7358 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that |
| 7359 | you are using. |
| 7360 | |
| 7361 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, |
| 7362 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). |
| 7363 | |
| 7364 | ** File locking works with NFS now. |
| 7365 | |
| 7366 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, |
| 7367 | in the same directory as FILENAME. |
| 7368 | |
| 7369 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now |
| 7370 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory |
| 7371 | can become a bottleneck. |
| 7372 | |
| 7373 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection |
| 7374 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot |
| 7375 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the |
| 7376 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are |
| 7377 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is |
| 7378 | so useful that the change is worth while. |
| 7379 | |
| 7380 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which |
| 7381 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious |
| 7382 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just |
| 7383 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. |
| 7384 | |
| 7385 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, |
| 7386 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call |
| 7387 | show-paren-mode. |
| 7388 | |
| 7389 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted |
| 7390 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load |
| 7391 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. |
| 7392 | |
| 7393 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words |
| 7394 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load |
| 7395 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. |
| 7396 | |
| 7397 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, |
| 7398 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also |
| 7399 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. |
| 7400 | |
| 7401 | ** Changes in View mode. |
| 7402 | |
| 7403 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. |
| 7404 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. |
| 7405 | |
| 7406 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: |
| 7407 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. |
| 7408 | |
| 7409 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their |
| 7410 | previous state. |
| 7411 | |
| 7412 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, |
| 7413 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. |
| 7414 | |
| 7415 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If |
| 7416 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, |
| 7417 | not just the selected window. |
| 7418 | |
| 7419 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a |
| 7420 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only |
| 7421 | turns View mode on or off. |
| 7422 | |
| 7423 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls |
| 7424 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, |
| 7425 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. |
| 7426 | |
| 7427 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, |
| 7428 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. |
| 7429 | |
| 7430 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, |
| 7431 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is |
| 7432 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks |
| 7433 | which version to compare with. |
| 7434 | |
| 7435 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden |
| 7436 | blocks if a match is inside the block. |
| 7437 | |
| 7438 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match |
| 7439 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable |
| 7440 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily |
| 7441 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. |
| 7442 | |
| 7443 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind |
| 7444 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code |
| 7445 | blocks, all of them or none. |
| 7446 | |
| 7447 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the |
| 7448 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for |
| 7449 | confirmation first. |
| 7450 | |
| 7451 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, |
| 7452 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. |
| 7453 | However, the mode will not be changed if |
| 7454 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or |
| 7455 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, |
| 7456 | not suitable for ordinary files, or |
| 7457 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. |
| 7458 | |
| 7459 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. |
| 7460 | |
| 7461 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then |
| 7462 | these commands do not change the major mode. |
| 7463 | |
| 7464 | ** M-x occur changes. |
| 7465 | |
| 7466 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, |
| 7467 | it performs a case-sensitive search. |
| 7468 | |
| 7469 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, |
| 7470 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search |
| 7471 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. |
| 7472 | |
| 7473 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted |
| 7474 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the |
| 7475 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in |
| 7476 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same |
| 7477 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. |
| 7478 | |
| 7479 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates |
| 7480 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings |
| 7481 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents |
| 7482 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. |
| 7483 | |
| 7484 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
| 7485 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the |
| 7486 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. |
| 7487 | |
| 7488 | ** Outline mode changes. |
| 7489 | |
| 7490 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). |
| 7491 | |
| 7492 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. |
| 7493 | |
| 7494 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if |
| 7495 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. |
| 7496 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that |
| 7497 | was already active. |
| 7498 | |
| 7499 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not |
| 7500 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then |
| 7501 | get confused by it. |
| 7502 | |
| 7503 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must |
| 7504 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. |
| 7505 | |
| 7506 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. |
| 7507 | |
| 7508 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
| 7509 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first |
| 7510 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion |
| 7511 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. |
| 7512 | |
| 7513 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has |
| 7514 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always |
| 7515 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. |
| 7516 | |
| 7517 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' |
| 7518 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible |
| 7519 | values. |
| 7520 | |
| 7521 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve |
| 7522 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). |
| 7523 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore |
| 7524 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). |
| 7525 | |
| 7526 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a |
| 7527 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they |
| 7528 | can be. The default value is 30. |
| 7529 | |
| 7530 | ** Changes in Mail mode. |
| 7531 | |
| 7532 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. |
| 7533 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail |
| 7534 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable |
| 7535 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is |
| 7536 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old |
| 7537 | behavior. |
| 7538 | |
| 7539 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs |
| 7540 | compose-mail-other-frame. |
| 7541 | |
| 7542 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use |
| 7543 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are |
| 7544 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the |
| 7545 | buffer that shows the original message. |
| 7546 | |
| 7547 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, |
| 7548 | with separator lines around the contents. |
| 7549 | |
| 7550 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases |
| 7551 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias |
| 7552 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not |
| 7553 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. |
| 7554 | |
| 7555 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. |
| 7556 | |
| 7557 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, |
| 7558 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style |
| 7559 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. |
| 7560 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. |
| 7561 | |
| 7562 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command |
| 7563 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in |
| 7564 | /etc/passwd. |
| 7565 | |
| 7566 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read |
| 7567 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: |
| 7568 | /etc/passwd. |
| 7569 | |
| 7570 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of |
| 7571 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a |
| 7572 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a |
| 7573 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. |
| 7574 | |
| 7575 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as |
| 7576 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise |
| 7577 | be taken to be magic. |
| 7578 | |
| 7579 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select |
| 7580 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is |
| 7581 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. |
| 7582 | |
| 7583 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. |
| 7584 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) |
| 7585 | |
| 7586 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names |
| 7587 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. |
| 7588 | |
| 7589 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. |
| 7590 | |
| 7591 | new key dired.el binding old key |
| 7592 | ------- ---------------- ------- |
| 7593 | * c dired-change-marks c |
| 7594 | * m dired-mark m |
| 7595 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) |
| 7596 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) |
| 7597 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) |
| 7598 | * u dired-unmark u |
| 7599 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL |
| 7600 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? |
| 7601 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
| 7602 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m |
| 7603 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} |
| 7604 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ |
| 7605 | |
| 7606 | ** Rmail changes. |
| 7607 | |
| 7608 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it |
| 7609 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer |
| 7610 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing |
| 7611 | each time you run it. |
| 7612 | |
| 7613 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls |
| 7614 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. |
| 7615 | |
| 7616 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete |
| 7617 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument |
| 7618 | means to move in the opposite direction. |
| 7619 | |
| 7620 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets |
| 7621 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. |
| 7622 | |
| 7623 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes |
| 7624 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. |
| 7625 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you |
| 7626 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used |
| 7627 | for output. |
| 7628 | |
| 7629 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 7630 | |
| 7631 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. |
| 7632 | |
| 7633 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
| 7634 | Gnus. |
| 7635 | |
| 7636 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like |
| 7637 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
| 7638 | |
| 7639 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the |
| 7640 | article mode line. |
| 7641 | |
| 7642 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. |
| 7643 | |
| 7644 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. |
| 7645 | |
| 7646 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) |
| 7647 | |
| 7648 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files |
| 7649 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See |
| 7650 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. |
| 7651 | |
| 7652 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. |
| 7653 | |
| 7654 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. |
| 7655 | |
| 7656 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. |
| 7657 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. |
| 7658 | |
| 7659 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. |
| 7660 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be |
| 7661 | used to pick articles. |
| 7662 | |
| 7663 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to |
| 7664 | another have been added. |
| 7665 | |
| 7666 | `M-x gnus-change-server' |
| 7667 | |
| 7668 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when |
| 7669 | generating lines in buffers. |
| 7670 | |
| 7671 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with |
| 7672 | `C-M-_'. |
| 7673 | |
| 7674 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. |
| 7675 | |
| 7676 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: |
| 7677 | |
| 7678 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) |
| 7679 | |
| 7680 | *** Scores can be decayed. |
| 7681 | |
| 7682 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
| 7683 | |
| 7684 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The |
| 7685 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. |
| 7686 | |
| 7687 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from |
| 7688 | the native server. |
| 7689 | |
| 7690 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' |
| 7691 | |
| 7692 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents |
| 7693 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. |
| 7694 | |
| 7695 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. |
| 7696 | |
| 7697 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post |
| 7698 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. |
| 7699 | |
| 7700 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines |
| 7701 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. |
| 7702 | |
| 7703 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such |
| 7704 | a group. |
| 7705 | |
| 7706 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard |
| 7707 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. |
| 7708 | |
| 7709 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. |
| 7710 | |
| 7711 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. |
| 7712 | |
| 7713 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. |
| 7714 | |
| 7715 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. |
| 7716 | |
| 7717 | Use the `Y c' command. |
| 7718 | |
| 7719 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. |
| 7720 | |
| 7721 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. |
| 7722 | |
| 7723 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' |
| 7724 | |
| 7725 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk |
| 7726 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. |
| 7727 | |
| 7728 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
| 7729 | |
| 7730 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. |
| 7731 | |
| 7732 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute |
| 7733 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. |
| 7734 | |
| 7735 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) |
| 7736 | |
| 7737 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically |
| 7738 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime |
| 7739 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this |
| 7740 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling |
| 7741 | this issue.) |
| 7742 | |
| 7743 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems |
| 7744 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a |
| 7745 | particular news group. This can be done by: |
| 7746 | |
| 7747 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 7748 | |
| 7749 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree |
| 7750 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under |
| 7751 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding |
| 7752 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both |
| 7753 | for reading and posting). |
| 7754 | |
| 7755 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form |
| 7756 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 7757 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the |
| 7758 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages |
| 7759 | there. |
| 7760 | |
| 7761 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by |
| 7762 | default. Here are some of these default settings: |
| 7763 | |
| 7764 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) |
| 7765 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) |
| 7766 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) |
| 7767 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) |
| 7768 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) |
| 7769 | |
| 7770 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; |
| 7771 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. |
| 7772 | |
| 7773 | ** CC mode changes. |
| 7774 | |
| 7775 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) |
| 7776 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global |
| 7777 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do |
| 7778 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. |
| 7779 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is |
| 7780 | loaded. |
| 7781 | |
| 7782 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, |
| 7783 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
| 7784 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
| 7785 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
| 7786 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you |
| 7787 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
| 7788 | |
| 7789 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name |
| 7790 | of the current buffer. |
| 7791 | |
| 7792 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because |
| 7793 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles |
| 7794 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. |
| 7795 | |
| 7796 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C |
| 7797 | style that the Python developers like. |
| 7798 | |
| 7799 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. |
| 7800 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, |
| 7801 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. |
| 7802 | |
| 7803 | ** VC Changes [new] |
| 7804 | |
| 7805 | *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
| 7806 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
| 7807 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). |
| 7808 | |
| 7809 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common |
| 7810 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other |
| 7811 | developers. |
| 7812 | |
| 7813 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q |
| 7814 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. |
| 7815 | |
| 7816 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by |
| 7817 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a |
| 7818 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then |
| 7819 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. |
| 7820 | |
| 7821 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for |
| 7822 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. |
| 7823 | |
| 7824 | ** Calendar changes. |
| 7825 | |
| 7826 | *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
| 7827 | subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow |
| 7828 | you do this for the year of the selected date, or the |
| 7829 | following/previous years. |
| 7830 | |
| 7831 | *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in |
| 7832 | the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i |
| 7833 | calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days |
| 7834 | each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The |
| 7835 | calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a |
| 7836 | supposed attribute of God. |
| 7837 | |
| 7838 | ** ps-print changes |
| 7839 | |
| 7840 | There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
| 7841 | layout. |
| 7842 | |
| 7843 | *** Headers & Footers (subgroup) |
| 7844 | |
| 7845 | Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to |
| 7846 | be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your |
| 7847 | printer system has this behavior, set variable |
| 7848 | `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. |
| 7849 | |
| 7850 | If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a |
| 7851 | blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the |
| 7852 | very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
| 7853 | |
| 7854 | The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for |
| 7855 | setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: |
| 7856 | |
| 7857 | lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. |
| 7858 | Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex |
| 7859 | printing for your printer. |
| 7860 | |
| 7861 | setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the |
| 7862 | setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
| 7863 | |
| 7864 | nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using |
| 7865 | the setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
| 7866 | |
| 7867 | The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on |
| 7868 | opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If |
| 7869 | `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for |
| 7870 | bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, |
| 7871 | ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. |
| 7872 | This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. |
| 7873 | The default value is nil. |
| 7874 | |
| 7875 | The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame |
| 7876 | properties alist. Valid frame properties are: |
| 7877 | |
| 7878 | fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. |
| 7879 | Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black |
| 7880 | color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a |
| 7881 | color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which |
| 7882 | correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each |
| 7883 | float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright |
| 7884 | color). The default is 0 ("black"). |
| 7885 | |
| 7886 | back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). |
| 7887 | The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). |
| 7888 | |
| 7889 | shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). |
| 7890 | The default is 0 ("black"). |
| 7891 | |
| 7892 | border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). |
| 7893 | The default is 0 ("black"). |
| 7894 | |
| 7895 | border-width Specify the border width. |
| 7896 | The default is 0.4. |
| 7897 | |
| 7898 | Any other property is ignored. |
| 7899 | |
| 7900 | Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the |
| 7901 | `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for |
| 7902 | documentation). |
| 7903 | |
| 7904 | Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: |
| 7905 | `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', |
| 7906 | `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', |
| 7907 | `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and |
| 7908 | `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those |
| 7909 | controlling headers. |
| 7910 | |
| 7911 | *** Color management (subgroup) |
| 7912 | |
| 7913 | If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in |
| 7914 | color. |
| 7915 | |
| 7916 | *** Face Management (subgroup) |
| 7917 | |
| 7918 | If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, |
| 7919 | set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face |
| 7920 | background should be used. Valid values are: |
| 7921 | |
| 7922 | t always use face background color. |
| 7923 | nil never use face background color. |
| 7924 | (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. |
| 7925 | |
| 7926 | *** N-up printing (subgroup) |
| 7927 | |
| 7928 | The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per |
| 7929 | sheet of paper. |
| 7930 | |
| 7931 | The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) |
| 7932 | between the sheet border and the n-up printing. |
| 7933 | |
| 7934 | If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around |
| 7935 | each page. |
| 7936 | |
| 7937 | The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled |
| 7938 | on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for |
| 7939 | `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: |
| 7940 | |
| 7941 | `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 |
| 7942 | 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 |
| 7943 | 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 |
| 7944 | |
| 7945 | `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 |
| 7946 | 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 |
| 7947 | 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 |
| 7948 | |
| 7949 | `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 |
| 7950 | 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 |
| 7951 | 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 |
| 7952 | |
| 7953 | `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 |
| 7954 | 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 |
| 7955 | 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 |
| 7956 | |
| 7957 | Any other value is treated as `left-top'. |
| 7958 | |
| 7959 | *** Zebra stripes (subgroup) |
| 7960 | |
| 7961 | The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or |
| 7962 | RGB color. |
| 7963 | |
| 7964 | The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes |
| 7965 | continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' |
| 7966 | to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): |
| 7967 | |
| 7968 | `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' |
| 7969 | Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
| 7970 | 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7971 | 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7972 | 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7973 | 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + |
| 7974 | 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + |
| 7975 | 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + |
| 7976 | 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7977 | 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7978 | 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7979 | 10 + 10 + |
| 7980 | 11 + 11 + |
| 7981 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
| 7982 | Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
| 7983 | 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + |
| 7984 | 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + |
| 7985 | 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + |
| 7986 | 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7987 | 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7988 | 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
| 7989 | 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + |
| 7990 | 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + |
| 7991 | 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + |
| 7992 | 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + |
| 7993 | 22 + 22 + |
| 7994 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
| 7995 | |
| 7996 | Any other value is treated as `nil'. |
| 7997 | |
| 7998 | |
| 7999 | *** Printer management (subgroup) |
| 8000 | |
| 8001 | The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by |
| 8002 | some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when |
| 8003 | `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr |
| 8004 | utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set |
| 8005 | to "-P". |
| 8006 | |
| 8007 | The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual |
| 8008 | paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's |
| 8009 | non-nil, manual feeding takes place. |
| 8010 | |
| 8011 | The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) |
| 8012 | should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means |
| 8013 | do so. |
| 8014 | |
| 8015 | *** Page settings (subgroup) |
| 8016 | |
| 8017 | If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an |
| 8018 | error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size |
| 8019 | indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used |
| 8020 | instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if |
| 8021 | the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated |
| 8022 | by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to |
| 8023 | `setpagedevice'. |
| 8024 | |
| 8025 | The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for |
| 8026 | printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means |
| 8027 | `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). |
| 8028 | |
| 8029 | The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If |
| 8030 | it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be |
| 8031 | integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) |
| 8032 | specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that |
| 8033 | is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than |
| 8034 | its TO, are ignored. |
| 8035 | |
| 8036 | The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd |
| 8037 | pages. Valid values are: |
| 8038 | |
| 8039 | nil print all pages. |
| 8040 | |
| 8041 | `even-page' print only even pages. |
| 8042 | |
| 8043 | `odd-page' print only odd pages. |
| 8044 | |
| 8045 | `even-sheet' print only even sheets. |
| 8046 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
| 8047 | `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll |
| 8048 | print only the even sheet of paper. |
| 8049 | |
| 8050 | `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. |
| 8051 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
| 8052 | `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print |
| 8053 | only the odd sheet of paper. |
| 8054 | |
| 8055 | Any other value is treated as nil. |
| 8056 | |
| 8057 | If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages |
| 8058 | are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by |
| 8059 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: |
| 8060 | |
| 8061 | (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) |
| 8062 | |
| 8063 | and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and |
| 8064 | `ps-n-up-printing', we get: |
| 8065 | |
| 8066 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 1: |
| 8067 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
| 8068 | nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 |
| 8069 | even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
| 8070 | odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
| 8071 | even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
| 8072 | odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
| 8073 | |
| 8074 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 2: |
| 8075 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
| 8076 | nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 |
| 8077 | even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 |
| 8078 | odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 |
| 8079 | even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 |
| 8080 | odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 |
| 8081 | |
| 8082 | *** Miscellany (subgroup) |
| 8083 | |
| 8084 | The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler |
| 8085 | messages should be sent. |
| 8086 | |
| 8087 | It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in |
| 8088 | front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable |
| 8089 | `ps-user-defined-prologue'. |
| 8090 | |
| 8091 | The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. |
| 8092 | |
| 8093 | The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in |
| 8094 | points for line numbers. |
| 8095 | |
| 8096 | The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line |
| 8097 | numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. |
| 8098 | |
| 8099 | The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which |
| 8100 | line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set |
| 8101 | to 2, the printing will look like: |
| 8102 | |
| 8103 | 1 one line |
| 8104 | one line |
| 8105 | 3 one line |
| 8106 | one line |
| 8107 | 5 one line |
| 8108 | one line |
| 8109 | ... |
| 8110 | |
| 8111 | Valid values are: |
| 8112 | |
| 8113 | integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are |
| 8114 | printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 |
| 8115 | is used. |
| 8116 | |
| 8117 | `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a |
| 8118 | zebra stripe is to be printed. |
| 8119 | |
| 8120 | Any other value is treated as `zebra'. |
| 8121 | |
| 8122 | The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in |
| 8123 | the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if |
| 8124 | `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to |
| 8125 | 3, the output will look like: |
| 8126 | |
| 8127 | one line |
| 8128 | one line |
| 8129 | 3 one line |
| 8130 | one line |
| 8131 | one line |
| 8132 | 6 one line |
| 8133 | one line |
| 8134 | one line |
| 8135 | 9 one line |
| 8136 | one line |
| 8137 | ... |
| 8138 | |
| 8139 | The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory |
| 8140 | where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. |
| 8141 | |
| 8142 | The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, |
| 8143 | for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
| 8144 | `ps-font-size'). |
| 8145 | |
| 8146 | The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, |
| 8147 | in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
| 8148 | `ps-font-size'). |
| 8149 | |
| 8150 | The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. |
| 8151 | |
| 8152 | The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the |
| 8153 | start and end of a region to cut out when printing. |
| 8154 | |
| 8155 | ** hideshow changes. |
| 8156 | |
| 8157 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for |
| 8158 | C++, ; for lisp). |
| 8159 | |
| 8160 | *** Support for java-mode added. |
| 8161 | |
| 8162 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments |
| 8163 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. |
| 8164 | |
| 8165 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
| 8166 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
| 8167 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. |
| 8168 | |
| 8169 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more |
| 8170 | robust and a lot faster. |
| 8171 | |
| 8172 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
| 8173 | |
| 8174 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow |
| 8175 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the |
| 8176 | documentation for more details. |
| 8177 | |
| 8178 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. |
| 8179 | |
| 8180 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is |
| 8181 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent |
| 8182 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in |
| 8183 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled |
| 8184 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. |
| 8185 | |
| 8186 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs |
| 8187 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines |
| 8188 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked |
| 8189 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. |
| 8190 | |
| 8191 | ** Font Lock mode |
| 8192 | |
| 8193 | *** Custom support |
| 8194 | |
| 8195 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and |
| 8196 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the |
| 8197 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom |
| 8198 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in |
| 8199 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should |
| 8200 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. |
| 8201 | |
| 8202 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. |
| 8203 | |
| 8204 | *** Maximum decoration |
| 8205 | |
| 8206 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by |
| 8207 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level |
| 8208 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration |
| 8209 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil |
| 8210 | to get the old behavior. |
| 8211 | |
| 8212 | *** New support |
| 8213 | |
| 8214 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. |
| 8215 | |
| 8216 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes |
| 8217 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. |
| 8218 | |
| 8219 | *** Configurable support |
| 8220 | |
| 8221 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for |
| 8222 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, |
| 8223 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, |
| 8224 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a |
| 8225 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value |
| 8226 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the |
| 8227 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. |
| 8228 | |
| 8229 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever |
| 8230 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make |
| 8231 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. |
| 8232 | |
| 8233 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support |
| 8234 | |
| 8235 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own |
| 8236 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, |
| 8237 | for any mode. |
| 8238 | |
| 8239 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: |
| 8240 | |
| 8241 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) |
| 8242 | |
| 8243 | in your ~/.emacs. |
| 8244 | |
| 8245 | *** New faces |
| 8246 | |
| 8247 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and |
| 8248 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, |
| 8249 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought |
| 8250 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. |
| 8251 | |
| 8252 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode |
| 8253 | |
| 8254 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process |
| 8255 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the |
| 8256 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. |
| 8257 | |
| 8258 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode |
| 8259 | |
| 8260 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify |
| 8261 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use |
| 8262 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If |
| 8263 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be |
| 8264 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only |
| 8265 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy |
| 8266 | Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. |
| 8267 | |
| 8268 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. |
| 8269 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if |
| 8270 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly |
| 8271 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line |
| 8272 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use |
| 8273 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. |
| 8274 | |
| 8275 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: |
| 8276 | |
| 8277 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. |
| 8278 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. |
| 8279 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the |
| 8280 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. |
| 8281 | |
| 8282 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those |
| 8283 | settings. |
| 8284 | |
| 8285 | ** Ada mode changes. |
| 8286 | |
| 8287 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. |
| 8288 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same |
| 8289 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but |
| 8290 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure |
| 8291 | stubs. |
| 8292 | |
| 8293 | *** There are two new commands: |
| 8294 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer |
| 8295 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. |
| 8296 | |
| 8297 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', |
| 8298 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and |
| 8299 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
| 8300 | |
| 8301 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level |
| 8302 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. |
| 8303 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. |
| 8304 | |
| 8305 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of |
| 8306 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, |
| 8307 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one |
| 8308 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. |
| 8309 | |
| 8310 | ** Scheme mode changes. |
| 8311 | |
| 8312 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp |
| 8313 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used |
| 8314 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables |
| 8315 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer |
| 8316 | have any effect. |
| 8317 | |
| 8318 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is |
| 8319 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to |
| 8320 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation |
| 8321 | variables as buffer-local variables. |
| 8322 | |
| 8323 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. |
| 8324 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. |
| 8325 | |
| 8326 | ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
| 8327 | |
| 8328 | *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
| 8329 | USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID |
| 8330 | associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root |
| 8331 | can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. |
| 8332 | |
| 8333 | *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
| 8334 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
| 8335 | buffer in Emacs. |
| 8336 | |
| 8337 | *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
| 8338 | use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
| 8339 | ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
| 8340 | option takes precedence. |
| 8341 | |
| 8342 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
| 8343 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point |
| 8344 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). |
| 8345 | |
| 8346 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, |
| 8347 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just |
| 8348 | the current defun. |
| 8349 | |
| 8350 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all |
| 8351 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. |
| 8352 | |
| 8353 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, |
| 8354 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if |
| 8355 | necessary). |
| 8356 | |
| 8357 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, |
| 8358 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, |
| 8359 | these register values no longer become completely useless. |
| 8360 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are |
| 8361 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, |
| 8362 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. |
| 8363 | |
| 8364 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for |
| 8365 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may |
| 8366 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever |
| 8367 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. |
| 8368 | |
| 8369 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the |
| 8370 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a |
| 8371 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and |
| 8372 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but |
| 8373 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. |
| 8374 | |
| 8375 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font |
| 8376 | since it applies only to the current frame. |
| 8377 | |
| 8378 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the |
| 8379 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, |
| 8380 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) |
| 8381 | |
| 8382 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of |
| 8383 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local |
| 8384 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for |
| 8385 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document |
| 8386 | instead of just the file you are editing. |
| 8387 | |
| 8388 | ** RefTeX mode |
| 8389 | |
| 8390 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref |
| 8391 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of |
| 8392 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for |
| 8393 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and |
| 8394 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: |
| 8395 | |
| 8396 | C-c ( reftex-label |
| 8397 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
| 8398 | knows which kind of label is needed. |
| 8399 | |
| 8400 | C-c ) reftex-reference |
| 8401 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the |
| 8402 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. |
| 8403 | |
| 8404 | C-c [ reftex-citation |
| 8405 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX |
| 8406 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. |
| 8407 | |
| 8408 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref |
| 8409 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. |
| 8410 | |
| 8411 | C-c = reftex-toc |
| 8412 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you |
| 8413 | can quickly jump to every section. |
| 8414 | |
| 8415 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
| 8416 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. |
| 8417 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file |
| 8418 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: |
| 8419 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el |
| 8420 | |
| 8421 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 8422 | |
| 8423 | *** Info documentation is now available. |
| 8424 | |
| 8425 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused |
| 8426 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. |
| 8427 | |
| 8428 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to |
| 8429 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. |
| 8430 | |
| 8431 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote |
| 8432 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). |
| 8433 | |
| 8434 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete |
| 8435 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by |
| 8436 | appropriate functions. |
| 8437 | |
| 8438 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of |
| 8439 | entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. |
| 8440 | |
| 8441 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has |
| 8442 | been cleaned. |
| 8443 | |
| 8444 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables |
| 8445 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. |
| 8446 | |
| 8447 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries |
| 8448 | shall be delimited. |
| 8449 | |
| 8450 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of |
| 8451 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and |
| 8452 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. |
| 8453 | |
| 8454 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor |
| 8455 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are |
| 8456 | prefixed with `ALT'. |
| 8457 | |
| 8458 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable |
| 8459 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many |
| 8460 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable |
| 8461 | documentation). |
| 8462 | |
| 8463 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See |
| 8464 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions |
| 8465 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. |
| 8466 | |
| 8467 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if |
| 8468 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. |
| 8469 | |
| 8470 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if |
| 8471 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal |
| 8472 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). |
| 8473 | |
| 8474 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. |
| 8475 | |
| 8476 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. |
| 8477 | |
| 8478 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database |
| 8479 | from alien sources. |
| 8480 | |
| 8481 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) |
| 8482 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in |
| 8483 | crossref entries. |
| 8484 | |
| 8485 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or |
| 8486 | region. |
| 8487 | |
| 8488 | *** Added support for imenu. |
| 8489 | |
| 8490 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead |
| 8491 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a |
| 8492 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. |
| 8493 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. |
| 8494 | |
| 8495 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files |
| 8496 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. |
| 8497 | |
| 8498 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. |
| 8499 | |
| 8500 | ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
| 8501 | |
| 8502 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
| 8503 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. |
| 8504 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory |
| 8505 | as an argument. |
| 8506 | |
| 8507 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read |
| 8508 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). |
| 8509 | |
| 8510 | ** browse-url changes |
| 8511 | |
| 8512 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), |
| 8513 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window |
| 8514 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic |
| 8515 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated |
| 8516 | customization variables. |
| 8517 | |
| 8518 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. |
| 8519 | |
| 8520 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across |
| 8521 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps |
| 8522 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. |
| 8523 | |
| 8524 | ** Changes in Ediff |
| 8525 | |
| 8526 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel |
| 8527 | pops up the Info file for this command. |
| 8528 | |
| 8529 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether |
| 8530 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when |
| 8531 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different |
| 8532 | directories). |
| 8533 | |
| 8534 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare |
| 8535 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of |
| 8536 | files in the same directory. |
| 8537 | |
| 8538 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. |
| 8539 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug |
| 8540 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) |
| 8541 | |
| 8542 | ** Changes in Viper |
| 8543 | |
| 8544 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip |
| 8545 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
| 8546 | instead of vip-. |
| 8547 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. |
| 8548 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
| 8549 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
| 8550 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. |
| 8551 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. |
| 8552 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor |
| 8553 | color when Viper is in insert state. |
| 8554 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, |
| 8555 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable |
| 8556 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. |
| 8557 | |
| 8558 | ** Etags changes. |
| 8559 | |
| 8560 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by |
| 8561 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. |
| 8562 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag |
| 8563 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does |
| 8564 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. |
| 8565 | |
| 8566 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. |
| 8567 | |
| 8568 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" |
| 8569 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. |
| 8570 | |
| 8571 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are |
| 8572 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). |
| 8573 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. |
| 8574 | |
| 8575 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and |
| 8576 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags |
| 8577 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, |
| 8578 | methods and protocols. |
| 8579 | |
| 8580 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension |
| 8581 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in |
| 8582 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a |
| 8583 | paragraph name. |
| 8584 | |
| 8585 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of |
| 8586 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression |
| 8587 | at least M times and as many as N times. |
| 8588 | |
| 8589 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert |
| 8590 | in files has changed slightly. |
| 8591 | |
| 8592 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, |
| 8593 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. |
| 8594 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility |
| 8595 | with old time-stamp-format values. |
| 8596 | |
| 8597 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign |
| 8598 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. |
| 8599 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility |
| 8600 | reasons. |
| 8601 | |
| 8602 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their |
| 8603 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a |
| 8604 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon |
| 8605 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical |
| 8606 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are |
| 8607 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". |
| 8608 | |
| 8609 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the |
| 8610 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit |
| 8611 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. |
| 8612 | |
| 8613 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are |
| 8614 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the |
| 8615 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being |
| 8616 | recommended now will continue to work then. |
| 8617 | |
| 8618 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for |
| 8619 | details. |
| 8620 | |
| 8621 | ** There are some additional major modes: |
| 8622 | |
| 8623 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. |
| 8624 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. |
| 8625 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. |
| 8626 | |
| 8627 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you |
| 8628 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell |
| 8629 | into Emacs. |
| 8630 | |
| 8631 | ** New Lisp packages include: |
| 8632 | |
| 8633 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. |
| 8634 | |
| 8635 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might |
| 8636 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. |
| 8637 | |
| 8638 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. |
| 8639 | |
| 8640 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes |
| 8641 | in shell buffers. |
| 8642 | |
| 8643 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. |
| 8644 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' |
| 8645 | and `elint-defun'. |
| 8646 | |
| 8647 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is |
| 8648 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary |
| 8649 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within |
| 8650 | strings or comments. |
| 8651 | |
| 8652 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an |
| 8653 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, |
| 8654 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these |
| 8655 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text |
| 8656 | at these points. |
| 8657 | |
| 8658 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you |
| 8659 | can visit them by short forms of their names. |
| 8660 | |
| 8661 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded |
| 8662 | Emacs Lisp function at point. |
| 8663 | |
| 8664 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. |
| 8665 | |
| 8666 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like |
| 8667 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. |
| 8668 | |
| 8669 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. |
| 8670 | |
| 8671 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. |
| 8672 | |
| 8673 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. |
| 8674 | |
| 8675 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations |
| 8676 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. |
| 8677 | |
| 8678 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. |
| 8679 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically |
| 8680 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its |
| 8681 | original place after inserting the copy. |
| 8682 | |
| 8683 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 |
| 8684 | on the buffer. |
| 8685 | |
| 8686 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the |
| 8687 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll |
| 8688 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. |
| 8689 | |
| 8690 | Enable mouse-drag with: |
| 8691 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) |
| 8692 | -or- |
| 8693 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) |
| 8694 | |
| 8695 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have |
| 8696 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. |
| 8697 | |
| 8698 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. |
| 8699 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. |
| 8700 | |
| 8701 | *** ogonek |
| 8702 | |
| 8703 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of |
| 8704 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various |
| 8705 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and |
| 8706 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to |
| 8707 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to |
| 8708 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for |
| 8709 | instance) and vice versa. |
| 8710 | |
| 8711 | To use this package load it using |
| 8712 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek |
| 8713 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of |
| 8714 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
| 8715 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
| 8716 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the |
| 8717 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. |
| 8718 | |
| 8719 | *** Interface to ph. |
| 8720 | |
| 8721 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) |
| 8722 | |
| 8723 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory |
| 8724 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to |
| 8725 | these servers. |
| 8726 | |
| 8727 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. |
| 8728 | |
| 8729 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. |
| 8730 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands |
| 8731 | while the real cursor does not move. |
| 8732 | |
| 8733 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up |
| 8734 | for visiting your favorite web sites. |
| 8735 | |
| 8736 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, |
| 8737 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. |
| 8738 | |
| 8739 | ** movemail change |
| 8740 | |
| 8741 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP |
| 8742 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer |
| 8743 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the |
| 8744 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. |
| 8745 | |
| 8746 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. |
| 8747 | \f |
| 8748 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
| 8749 | |
| 8750 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. |
| 8751 | |
| 8752 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing |
| 8753 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the |
| 8754 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific |
| 8755 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special |
| 8756 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. |
| 8757 | |
| 8758 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use |
| 8759 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different |
| 8760 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly |
| 8761 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with |
| 8762 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to |
| 8763 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. |
| 8764 | \f |
| 8765 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
| 8766 | |
| 8767 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in |
| 8768 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And |
| 8769 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in |
| 8770 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. |
| 8771 | |
| 8772 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed |
| 8773 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. |
| 8774 | |
| 8775 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We |
| 8776 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it |
| 8777 | "win". |
| 8778 | |
| 8779 | ** Basic Lisp changes |
| 8780 | |
| 8781 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically |
| 8782 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. |
| 8783 | |
| 8784 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now |
| 8785 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program |
| 8786 | or by the user. |
| 8787 | |
| 8788 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. |
| 8789 | |
| 8790 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' |
| 8791 | |
| 8792 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) |
| 8793 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) |
| 8794 | |
| 8795 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their |
| 8796 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of |
| 8797 | its argument. |
| 8798 | |
| 8799 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. |
| 8800 | |
| 8801 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. |
| 8802 | |
| 8803 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. |
| 8804 | |
| 8805 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an |
| 8806 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives |
| 8807 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the |
| 8808 | `format' function. |
| 8809 | |
| 8810 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el |
| 8811 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file |
| 8812 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. |
| 8813 | |
| 8814 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain |
| 8815 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on |
| 8816 | adding one of these suffixes. |
| 8817 | |
| 8818 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE |
| 8819 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. |
| 8820 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
| 8821 | |
| 8822 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, |
| 8823 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. |
| 8824 | |
| 8825 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. |
| 8826 | |
| 8827 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. |
| 8828 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. |
| 8829 | |
| 8830 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression |
| 8831 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: |
| 8832 | |
| 8833 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) |
| 8834 | |
| 8835 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. |
| 8836 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. |
| 8837 | |
| 8838 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the |
| 8839 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or |
| 8840 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' |
| 8841 | works using `save-current-buffer'. |
| 8842 | |
| 8843 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and |
| 8844 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value |
| 8845 | of the last form. |
| 8846 | |
| 8847 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, |
| 8848 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the |
| 8849 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) |
| 8850 | as the last form. |
| 8851 | |
| 8852 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain |
| 8853 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the |
| 8854 | matches. |
| 8855 | |
| 8856 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). |
| 8857 | |
| 8858 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions |
| 8859 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. |
| 8860 | Then it returns that string. |
| 8861 | |
| 8862 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', |
| 8863 | |
| 8864 | (with-output-to-string |
| 8865 | (princ "The buffer is ") |
| 8866 | (princ (buffer-name))) |
| 8867 | |
| 8868 | returns "The buffer is foo". |
| 8869 | |
| 8870 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters |
| 8871 | is non-nil. |
| 8872 | |
| 8873 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the |
| 8874 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte |
| 8875 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. |
| 8876 | |
| 8877 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in |
| 8878 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). |
| 8879 | |
| 8880 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; |
| 8881 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. |
| 8882 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer |
| 8883 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole |
| 8884 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to |
| 8885 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). |
| 8886 | |
| 8887 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. |
| 8888 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent |
| 8889 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte |
| 8890 | characters". |
| 8891 | |
| 8892 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 |
| 8893 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called |
| 8894 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the |
| 8895 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the |
| 8896 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. |
| 8897 | |
| 8898 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore |
| 8899 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a |
| 8900 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a |
| 8901 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. |
| 8902 | |
| 8903 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is |
| 8904 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. |
| 8905 | |
| 8906 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. |
| 8907 | |
| 8908 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
| 8909 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters |
| 8910 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, |
| 8911 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, |
| 8912 | guaranteed. |
| 8913 | |
| 8914 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is |
| 8915 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a |
| 8916 | character). |
| 8917 | |
| 8918 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: |
| 8919 | |
| 8920 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, |
| 8921 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 8922 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 8923 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 8924 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. |
| 8925 | |
| 8926 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. |
| 8927 | |
| 8928 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function |
| 8929 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be |
| 8930 | more than the number of characters. |
| 8931 | |
| 8932 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing |
| 8933 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, |
| 8934 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which |
| 8935 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to |
| 8936 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and |
| 8937 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. |
| 8938 | |
| 8939 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters |
| 8940 | and returns a string containing those characters. |
| 8941 | |
| 8942 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. |
| 8943 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX |
| 8944 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a |
| 8945 | character, sref signals an error. |
| 8946 | |
| 8947 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters |
| 8948 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the |
| 8949 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
| 8950 | |
| 8951 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters |
| 8952 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the |
| 8953 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
| 8954 | |
| 8955 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of |
| 8956 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string |
| 8957 | to a vector of the characters in it. |
| 8958 | |
| 8959 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents |
| 8960 | of a string. You call it as follows: |
| 8961 | |
| 8962 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) |
| 8963 | |
| 8964 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in |
| 8965 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. |
| 8966 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. |
| 8967 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, |
| 8968 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. |
| 8969 | |
| 8970 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, |
| 8971 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
| 8972 | |
| 8973 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, |
| 8974 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
| 8975 | |
| 8976 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, |
| 8977 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does |
| 8978 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string |
| 8979 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) |
| 8980 | |
| 8981 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) |
| 8982 | |
| 8983 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. |
| 8984 | |
| 8985 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. |
| 8986 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string |
| 8987 | are not included in the resulting value. |
| 8988 | |
| 8989 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added |
| 8990 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly |
| 8991 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING |
| 8992 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. |
| 8993 | |
| 8994 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean |
| 8995 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one |
| 8996 | character extends across that column), then the padding character |
| 8997 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result |
| 8998 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at |
| 8999 | column START-COLUMN. |
| 9000 | |
| 9001 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, |
| 9002 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not |
| 9003 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the |
| 9004 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the |
| 9005 | changed text, before the change. |
| 9006 | |
| 9007 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character |
| 9008 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is |
| 9009 | one character set for each script, not for each language. |
| 9010 | |
| 9011 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. |
| 9012 | |
| 9013 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. |
| 9014 | |
| 9015 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character |
| 9016 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) |
| 9017 | |
| 9018 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the |
| 9019 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values |
| 9020 | which identify the character within that character set. |
| 9021 | |
| 9022 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent |
| 9023 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the |
| 9024 | opposite of split-char. |
| 9025 | |
| 9026 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets |
| 9027 | of all the characters between BEG and END. |
| 9028 | |
| 9029 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets |
| 9030 | of all the characters in a string. |
| 9031 | |
| 9032 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems |
| 9033 | and specifying coding systems. |
| 9034 | |
| 9035 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding |
| 9036 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list |
| 9037 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. |
| 9038 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix |
| 9039 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well |
| 9040 | as what to do about code conversion.) |
| 9041 | |
| 9042 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system |
| 9043 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. |
| 9044 | |
| 9045 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
| 9046 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
| 9047 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. |
| 9048 | |
| 9049 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
| 9050 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp |
| 9051 | to match against a file name. |
| 9052 | |
| 9053 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
| 9054 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
| 9055 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
| 9056 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
| 9057 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
| 9058 | specifies the coding system for encoding. |
| 9059 | |
| 9060 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
| 9061 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
| 9062 | |
| 9063 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies |
| 9064 | the coding system to use for network sockets. |
| 9065 | |
| 9066 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
| 9067 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be |
| 9068 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network |
| 9069 | service names. |
| 9070 | |
| 9071 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
| 9072 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
| 9073 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
| 9074 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
| 9075 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
| 9076 | specifies the coding system for encoding. |
| 9077 | |
| 9078 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
| 9079 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
| 9080 | |
| 9081 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
| 9082 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
| 9083 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to |
| 9084 | start the subprocess. |
| 9085 | |
| 9086 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding |
| 9087 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, |
| 9088 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell |
| 9089 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output |
| 9090 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. |
| 9091 | |
| 9092 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the |
| 9093 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous |
| 9094 | subprocess. |
| 9095 | |
| 9096 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, |
| 9097 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you |
| 9098 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or |
| 9099 | connection permanently or until overridden. |
| 9100 | |
| 9101 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over |
| 9102 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and |
| 9103 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a |
| 9104 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. |
| 9105 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding |
| 9106 | system for one operation at a time. |
| 9107 | |
| 9108 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from |
| 9109 | files, subprocesses or network connections. |
| 9110 | |
| 9111 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what |
| 9112 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. |
| 9113 | The value is a cons cell, |
| 9114 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 9115 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from |
| 9116 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding |
| 9117 | input to the subprocess. |
| 9118 | |
| 9119 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to |
| 9120 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. |
| 9121 | |
| 9122 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many |
| 9123 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, |
| 9124 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. |
| 9125 | |
| 9126 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option |
| 9127 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of |
| 9128 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are |
| 9129 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for |
| 9130 | customization. |
| 9131 | |
| 9132 | Thus, instead of writing |
| 9133 | |
| 9134 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil |
| 9135 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") |
| 9136 | |
| 9137 | you would now write this: |
| 9138 | |
| 9139 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil |
| 9140 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." |
| 9141 | :type 'boolean |
| 9142 | :group foo) |
| 9143 | |
| 9144 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only |
| 9145 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values |
| 9146 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom |
| 9147 | for a description of them. |
| 9148 | |
| 9149 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option |
| 9150 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: |
| 9151 | |
| 9152 | (defgroup ispell nil |
| 9153 | "Spell checking using Ispell." |
| 9154 | :group 'processes) |
| 9155 | |
| 9156 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root |
| 9157 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, |
| 9158 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond |
| 9159 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come |
| 9160 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. |
| 9161 | |
| 9162 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple |
| 9163 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should |
| 9164 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a |
| 9165 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" |
| 9166 | first-level subgroups. |
| 9167 | |
| 9168 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. |
| 9169 | |
| 9170 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a |
| 9171 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. |
| 9172 | |
| 9173 | ** easy-mmode |
| 9174 | |
| 9175 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make |
| 9176 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code |
| 9177 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, |
| 9178 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro |
| 9179 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also |
| 9180 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. |
| 9181 | |
| 9182 | ** Text property changes |
| 9183 | |
| 9184 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a |
| 9185 | text property. |
| 9186 | |
| 9187 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and |
| 9188 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a |
| 9189 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The |
| 9190 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the |
| 9191 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. |
| 9192 | |
| 9193 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If |
| 9194 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part |
| 9195 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the |
| 9196 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. |
| 9197 | |
| 9198 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property |
| 9199 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This |
| 9200 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. |
| 9201 | |
| 9202 | ** Changes in invisibility features |
| 9203 | |
| 9204 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are |
| 9205 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match |
| 9206 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay |
| 9207 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that |
| 9208 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should |
| 9209 | make the overlay visible. |
| 9210 | |
| 9211 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the |
| 9212 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are |
| 9213 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary |
| 9214 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is |
| 9215 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and |
| 9216 | t when it should hide it. |
| 9217 | |
| 9218 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec |
| 9219 | |
| 9220 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the |
| 9221 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
| 9222 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. |
| 9223 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
| 9224 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
| 9225 | Here is an example of how to do this: |
| 9226 | |
| 9227 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: |
| 9228 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 9229 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
| 9230 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 9231 | |
| 9232 | ... |
| 9233 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) |
| 9234 | |
| 9235 | ... |
| 9236 | ;; When done with the overlays: |
| 9237 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 9238 | ;; Or respectively: |
| 9239 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 9240 | |
| 9241 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. |
| 9242 | |
| 9243 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as |
| 9244 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now |
| 9245 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable |
| 9246 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. |
| 9247 | |
| 9248 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior |
| 9249 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always |
| 9250 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. |
| 9251 | |
| 9252 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a |
| 9253 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: |
| 9254 | |
| 9255 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character |
| 9256 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; |
| 9257 | |
| 9258 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid |
| 9259 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., |
| 9260 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). |
| 9261 | |
| 9262 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property |
| 9263 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used |
| 9264 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to |
| 9265 | determine the syntax type of the character. |
| 9266 | |
| 9267 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table |
| 9268 | of the current buffer. |
| 9269 | |
| 9270 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the |
| 9271 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as |
| 9272 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. |
| 9273 | |
| 9274 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 |
| 9275 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended |
| 9276 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A |
| 9277 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by |
| 9278 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). |
| 9279 | |
| 9280 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' |
| 9281 | text property. |
| 9282 | |
| 9283 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth |
| 9284 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start |
| 9285 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. |
| 9286 | |
| 9287 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' |
| 9288 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth |
| 9289 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; |
| 9290 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the |
| 9291 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. |
| 9292 | |
| 9293 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete |
| 9294 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports |
| 9295 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. |
| 9296 | |
| 9297 | ** Changes in face features |
| 9298 | |
| 9299 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even |
| 9300 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. |
| 9301 | |
| 9302 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string |
| 9303 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). |
| 9304 | |
| 9305 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. |
| 9306 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. |
| 9307 | |
| 9308 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. |
| 9309 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. |
| 9310 | |
| 9311 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text |
| 9312 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) |
| 9313 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in |
| 9314 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an |
| 9315 | overlay property). |
| 9316 | |
| 9317 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use |
| 9318 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. |
| 9319 | |
| 9320 | ** Changes in file-handling functions |
| 9321 | |
| 9322 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant |
| 9323 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, |
| 9324 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion |
| 9325 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. |
| 9326 | |
| 9327 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name |
| 9328 | begins with ~. |
| 9329 | |
| 9330 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, |
| 9331 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. |
| 9332 | |
| 9333 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
| 9334 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. |
| 9335 | |
| 9336 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, |
| 9337 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. |
| 9338 | |
| 9339 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses |
| 9340 | character code conversion as well as other things. |
| 9341 | |
| 9342 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names |
| 9343 | (formerly it did not). |
| 9344 | |
| 9345 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR |
| 9346 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. |
| 9347 | |
| 9348 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps |
| 9349 | instead of constant strings. |
| 9350 | |
| 9351 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used |
| 9352 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of |
| 9353 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. |
| 9354 | |
| 9355 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, |
| 9356 | in the same way as before. |
| 9357 | |
| 9358 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. |
| 9359 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings |
| 9360 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. |
| 9361 | |
| 9362 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an |
| 9363 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing |
| 9364 | else, and returns nil. |
| 9365 | |
| 9366 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified |
| 9367 | directory cannot be listed. |
| 9368 | |
| 9369 | ** Changes in minibuffer input |
| 9370 | |
| 9371 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string |
| 9372 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an |
| 9373 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this |
| 9374 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two |
| 9375 | ways: |
| 9376 | |
| 9377 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. |
| 9378 | It is available through the history command M-n. |
| 9379 | |
| 9380 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, |
| 9381 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional |
| 9382 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the |
| 9383 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of |
| 9384 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. |
| 9385 | |
| 9386 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an |
| 9387 | argument in this way. |
| 9388 | |
| 9389 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties |
| 9390 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable |
| 9391 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. |
| 9392 | |
| 9393 | ** Echo area features |
| 9394 | |
| 9395 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook |
| 9396 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the |
| 9397 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active |
| 9398 | after the echo area is cleared. |
| 9399 | |
| 9400 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed |
| 9401 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. |
| 9402 | |
| 9403 | ** Keyboard input features |
| 9404 | |
| 9405 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was |
| 9406 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. |
| 9407 | |
| 9408 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events |
| 9409 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated |
| 9410 | by keyboard macros. |
| 9411 | |
| 9412 | ** Frame-related changes |
| 9413 | |
| 9414 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before |
| 9415 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal |
| 9416 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. |
| 9417 | |
| 9418 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time |
| 9419 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration |
| 9420 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. |
| 9421 | |
| 9422 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
| 9423 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the |
| 9424 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed |
| 9425 | in the selected frame. |
| 9426 | |
| 9427 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars |
| 9428 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies |
| 9429 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. |
| 9430 | |
| 9431 | ** X Windows features |
| 9432 | |
| 9433 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding |
| 9434 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of |
| 9435 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. |
| 9436 | |
| 9437 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. |
| 9438 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. |
| 9439 | |
| 9440 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument |
| 9441 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. |
| 9442 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. |
| 9443 | |
| 9444 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, |
| 9445 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. |
| 9446 | |
| 9447 | ** Subprocess features |
| 9448 | |
| 9449 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter |
| 9450 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this |
| 9451 | automatically. |
| 9452 | |
| 9453 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command |
| 9454 | and returns the output from the command as a string. |
| 9455 | |
| 9456 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, |
| 9457 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. |
| 9458 | |
| 9459 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook |
| 9460 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. |
| 9461 | |
| 9462 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes |
| 9463 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it |
| 9464 | goes after the other menu items. |
| 9465 | |
| 9466 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area |
| 9467 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
| 9468 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
| 9469 | are in use. |
| 9470 | |
| 9471 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a |
| 9472 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. |
| 9473 | |
| 9474 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and |
| 9475 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls |
| 9476 | form. |
| 9477 | |
| 9478 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION |
| 9479 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, |
| 9480 | but its hook is still run. |
| 9481 | |
| 9482 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) |
| 9483 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. |
| 9484 | |
| 9485 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called |
| 9486 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is |
| 9487 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. |
| 9488 | |
| 9489 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that |
| 9490 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process |
| 9491 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't |
| 9492 | warned. |
| 9493 | |
| 9494 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own |
| 9495 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". |
| 9496 | |
| 9497 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at |
| 9498 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for |
| 9499 | functions like display-time. |
| 9500 | |
| 9501 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file |
| 9502 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. |
| 9503 | |
| 9504 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that |
| 9505 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode |
| 9506 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. |
| 9507 | |
| 9508 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code |
| 9509 | if there is an error in compilation. |
| 9510 | |
| 9511 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and |
| 9512 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional |
| 9513 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, |
| 9514 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. |
| 9515 | |
| 9516 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, |
| 9517 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing |
| 9518 | the *scratch* buffer. |
| 9519 | |
| 9520 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. |
| 9521 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used |
| 9522 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, |
| 9523 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. |
| 9524 | |
| 9525 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, |
| 9526 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. |
| 9527 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. |
| 9528 | |
| 9529 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message |
| 9530 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the |
| 9531 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window |
| 9532 | and compose-mail-other-frame. |
| 9533 | |
| 9534 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which |
| 9535 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The |
| 9536 | full name of the specified user will be returned. |
| 9537 | |
| 9538 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort |
| 9539 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding |
| 9540 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found |
| 9541 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q |
| 9542 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization |
| 9543 | files at all. |
| 9544 | |
| 9545 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width |
| 9546 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field |
| 9547 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start |
| 9548 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. |
| 9549 | |
| 9550 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the |
| 9551 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad |
| 9552 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that |
| 9553 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. |
| 9554 | |
| 9555 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. |
| 9556 | |
| 9557 | ** imenu.el changes. |
| 9558 | |
| 9559 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an |
| 9560 | item from menu created by imenu. |
| 9561 | |
| 9562 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the |
| 9563 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we |
| 9564 | select one of those items. |
| 9565 | \f |
| 9566 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
| 9567 | |
| 9568 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 9569 | Copyright information: |
| 9570 | |
| 9571 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 9572 | |
| 9573 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies |
| 9574 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the |
| 9575 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, |
| 9576 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. |
| 9577 | |
| 9578 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions |
| 9579 | of this document, or of portions of it, |
| 9580 | under the above conditions, provided also that they |
| 9581 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. |
| 9582 | \f |
| 9583 | Local variables: |
| 9584 | mode: outline |
| 9585 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" |
| 9586 | end: |